PL7 Junior/Pro Modicon Premium PLC Applications Analog ...ftp.ruigongye.com/200805/TLXPIDControl.pdf · Modicon Premium PLC Applications Analog, Regulation PID, Weighing ... Related

PL7 Junior/ProModicon Premium PLC ApplicationsAnalog, Regulation PID, Weighing eng

3500

9577

_00

March 2005

2

Related Documentation


At a Glance This manual is made up of 8 volumes: Volume 1

Common application specific functions Discrete Application AS-i Implementation Operator Dialog Application

Volume 2 Counting Application

Volume 3 Axis Command Application

Volume 4 Step by Step Control Application

Volume 5 Electronic Cam Application

Volume 6 SERCOS(r) Movement Command Application

Volume 7 Analog Application PID Control Application Weighing Application

Volume 8 Regulation Application

3


4

Table of Contents

About the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Part I Analog task function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1 The analog task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Introduction to the analog function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 2 The racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Displaying measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.2 TSX AEY 810 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Displaying measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2.3 TSX AEY 1614 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Introducing the TSX AEY 1614 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Displaying measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

5

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532.4 TSX AEY 414 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Introducing the TSX AEY 414 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Sensor link monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 414 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.5 TSX AEY 420 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Introducing the TSX AEY 420 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Thresholds and Event Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 420 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.6 TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Characteristics of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Output characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter 3 The remote analog TBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

3.1 TBX AES 400 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Introducing the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3.2 TBX AMS 620 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Timing of measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

6

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Filtering of measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Displaying measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Characteristics of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Fault handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs . . . . . . . . 114Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.3 TBX ASS 200 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Fault handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Chapter 4 The remote analog Momentum modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4.1 170 AAI 030 00 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.2 170 AAI 140 00 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129170 AAI 140 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

4.3 170 AAI 520 40 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135170 AAI 520 40 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

4.4 170 AAO 120 00 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Introducing the 170 AAI 120 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . 145

4.5 170 AAO 921 00 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Introducing the 170 AAI 921 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147170 AAO 921 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . 150

4.6 170 AMM 090 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152170 AAM 090 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

7

Chapter 5 Module configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5.1 Configuring the analog application: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module . . . . . 163Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module. . . . . . 165How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module . . . . . 167How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the FIPIO bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

5.2 Parameters for analog input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Input parameters for racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5.3 Parameters for analog output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Output parameters for racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5.4 Module configurations (illustrations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current . . . . 185Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel . . . . . . . . . 187Modifying the filter value of analog module channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module . . . . . . 190Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules 191Modifying Input channels used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection. . . . . . . . . . . . 193Cold junction compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 6 The Debugging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Description of an analog module debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Analog module diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Forcing/unforcing analog channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Detailed analog channel diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Modifying the channel filtering value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Aligning an input channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

8

Modifying the fallback value of an output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Calibration function for an analog module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 7 Associated bits and words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.1 Addressing of analog module objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Addressing objects of analog rack module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Addressing objects of remote analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

7.2 Implicit exchange objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

7.3 Explicit exchange objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Explicit exchange objects: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Details on analog function explicit exchange words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Part II The regulation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 8 General on the PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Principal of the regulation loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Development methodology of a regulation application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Chapter 9 Description of the regulation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Programming a regulation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244PID Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Programming the PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247PWM Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Programming the PWM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254SERVO Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Programming the SERVO function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Performance of the functions in the operating mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 10 Operator dialogue on CCX 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Dialog operator on the CCX 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Selecting a loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Controlling a loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Adjusting a loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270PID_MMI Function: programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

9

Chapter 11 Characteristics of the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Memory occupency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Function running time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Chapter 12 Example of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Description of the application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Configuration of the example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Programming the example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Chapter 13 Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291PID parameter adjustment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Role and influence of PID parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Part III Weighing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Chapter 14 General Introduction to the Weighing Dedicated Function . 301At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Description of the weighing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Operation of the weighing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Implementing the Weighing Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Weighing Application Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Chapter 15 Configuration of the Weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen . . . . . . 312Weighing Module Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313How to modify the task parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314How to modify metrological information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315How to modify the zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317How to modify the data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318How to modify the stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320How to Modify the Flow Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322How to Modify the Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323How to Modify the Threshold Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Chapter 16 Weighing programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

16.1 General on the weighing programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Principle of programming a weighing application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module . . . . . . . 330

10

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function . . . . . . . . . . 331Presymbolization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

16.2 Language objects for programmed exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

16.3 Language objects for user-defined exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Explicit Exchange Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2 . . . . . . . . . 343Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

16.4 Description of the commands conveyed by program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347How to carry out the tare mode via the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351How to return to gross weight measurement via the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353How to display the manual tare via the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

16.5 Modifying the parameters by program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Modify Parameters by Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358PL7 instructions used for adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Reading the configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Chapter 17 Calibrating the measurement string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Introduction to the Calibration Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Description of the Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Calibrating the Analog Measurement System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373How to Achieve Forced Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Performing a Forced Calibration by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Chapter 18 Debugging the weighing function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function . . 378Description of the module zone on the debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

11

Chapter 19 Protecting the adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386How to protect the adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Legal metrology and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Chapter 20 Operating a weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Ways of displaying weighing information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Description of the display transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Weighing module operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Chapter 21 Diagnostics of the weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Introduction to Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Chapter 22 Examples of the weighing program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401At a glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Example of a tare mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Dosage example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

12

About the book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual deals with the software implementation of applications (apart from communication applications) on TSX/PMX/PCX57 by the PL7 software.

Validity Note The update of this publication takes into account the functions of PL7 V4.5. Nevertheless, it enables you to use earlier versions of PL7.

Related Documents

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Hardware Implementation Manual TSX DM 57 xx E

13

About the book

14

I
Analog task function
At a Glance

Aim of this part This part introduces the analog task function on Premium PLCs and describes its implementation withPL7 software.

What's in this part?

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

1 The analog task 17

2 The racked analog modules 19

3 The remote analog TBX modules 91

4 The remote analog Momentum modules 123

5 Module configuration 161

6 The Debugging function 199

7 Associated bits and words 217

15

Analog task function

16

1
The analog task
Introduction to the analog function

Introduction The analog function applies to:

analog input/output modules placed on a rack, remote analog input/output modules on the FIPIO bus.

Installing the analog function requires the physical operating context to be defined in which it will be integrated (e.g. rack, supply, processor, modules or devices, etc.), and then the software installation to be carried out.

This second point is carried out by various PL7 editors:

either offline, or in online mode; in this instance, modification is limited to certain parameters.

Note: To access the latter, the configured processor must be a processor with a built-in FIPIO link.

Note: Online mode functions cannot be accessed for remote input/output modules.

17

Analog task

Installation principle

The table below shows the different installation phases for the analog function.

Mode Phase Description

Offline Module declaration Choice: of geographical position,

number and slot in the case of racked module, connection point for a remote module,

module type.

Configuration Entering configuration parameters.

Confirming configuration parameters

Confirmation at module level.

Global application confirmation

Confirmation at application level.

On- or offline Symbolization Symbolizing the variables associated with the application specific function.

Programming Programming the functions that the specific function must carry out using: word and bit objects associated with the module, task-specific instructions.

Online Transfer Transferring the application to the PLC.

Debugging Debugging the application using: debug help screens, allowing inputs and outputs to be

controlled, diagnostics screens, allowing faults to be identified.

Calibration Module calibration, which allows: long term module drifts to be corrected, increased measurement accuracy.

On- or offline Documentation Printing different information relating to the application.

Note: The order defined above is given as an indication. The PL7 software can use editors interactively in any order you wish (however you cannot use the data or program editors without first configuring the input/output modules).

18

2
The racked analog modules
At a Glance

Aim of this chapter?

This chapter introduces the racked analog modules.

What's in this Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

2.1 TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules 20

2.2 TSX AEY 810 Module 32




2.6 TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules 79

19

Racked analog modules

2.1 TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 rack modules.

What's in this Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules 21

Timing of measurements 23

Monitoring under/overshoot 25

Measurement filtering 27

Displaying measurements 29

Sensor alignment 30

Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules 31

20


Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

General The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules are high level 8 /16 input devices for industrial measurement.Associated to sensors or transmitters, they support surveillance, measurement and regulation functions for continuous processes.The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules support the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of their inputs, depending on the selection made in configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183).The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel in the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access channel command (forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

Structural diagram

The TSX ASY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 input modules support the following functions:

A/DMultiplexer

Sub

D c

onne

ctor

(s)

8 or

16

inpu

ts

Con

nect

or to

X b

us

Processing

DC/DCConverter

1000 Vrms

Channel selection

5 V

Function1 2 3 4 5

6

7

Opto-coupler

Opto-coupler

X busInterface

21


Description The table below shows the various functions

Address Element Function

1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels

physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), protection of the module against voltage surges using limiter diodes, adapting input signals using analog filtering, scanning input channels using static multiplexing.

2 Adapting input signals gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined at configuration (unipolar or bipolar range, voltage or current),

compensation for drifts in the amplification string.

3 Digitalization of analog input measurement signals

12 bit analog/digital converter.

4 transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user

acknowledgment of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module,

measurement filtering (digital filtering), based on configuration parameters,

scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.

5 Interface and communication with the application

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

6 Module power supply -

7 Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application

testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

22


Timing of measurements

At a Glance The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined on configuration: normal cycle or fast cycle. in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle

time is therefore proportional to the number of channels registered as used.

Channel scanning cycle

The scanning cycle of channels used in normal cycle is as follows:

The scanning cycle of channels used in fast cycle is as follows:

Note: In fast cycle, filtering is inhibited

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 7 (or 15) Internal ref.

Cycle time

Tv Tv Tv Tv

Tv = scanning time for one channel

Internal ref. = corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references built-in to the module, to allow periodic self-calibration

Channel 3 Channel 5

Tv Tv

Channel 6

Tv Tv

Internal ref.

Cycle time = (3+1)xTv



Example for channels 3, 5, 6

23


Calculating cycle time

The table below gives the values of cycle time according to the cycle used:

Illustration:

Module Normal cycle Fast cycle

TSX AEY 800 27 ms (N+1) x 3 ms where N = number of channels used.

TSX AEY 1600 51 ms (N+1) x 3 ms where N = number of channels used.

Note: The module cycle is asynchronous with the PLC cycle. At the start of each PLC cycle, the channel values are recognized. If the cycle time of the MAST task is less than that of the module, some values will not have changed.

changes of the channel values

MAST task time

Module processing time

24


Monitoring under/overshoot

At a Glance The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules give the choice of 6 ranges of voltage or current for each of their inputs. For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.This check is always enabled.Generally speaking, the modules will authorize an over/undershoot by 5% of the positive electrical part of the range.

Measurement zones

The measurement scale is divided into three zones:

the nominal zone is the measurement scale that corresponds to the range selected,

the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower limit.

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of saturation of the measurement string , which is signaled by:

nominal zoneundershoot zone overshoot zone

upper limitlower limit

Bit name Meaning (when = 1)

%Ixy.i.ERR Channel fault

%MWxy.i.2:X1 Range over/undershoot on the channel

25


Over/Undershoot limits

The over/undershoot limit values are as follows:

Range Lower limit Lower limit Values available by default in standardized format

Minimum limit in user-defined format

Maximum limit in user-defined format

+/-10V -10.5V +10.5V +/- 10500 Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

0..10V -0.5V +10.5V -500...10500 Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

0..5V 0V +5.25V -500...10500 approx. -10mV Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

1..5V 0.8V +5.25V -500...10500 Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

0..20mA 0mA +21mA 0...10500 approx. -40 A Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

4..20mA +3.2mA +20.8mA -500...10500 Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

µ

Note: Min designates the minimum value indicated by the user. Max designates the maximum value indicated by the user.

26


Measurement filtering

At a Glance The filtering used is first order filtering.The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modifying the channel filtering value, p. 208) from the PL7 screen or via the program.

Mathematical formula

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

with:=filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be modified, even when the application is in RUN mode.

Values for the TSX AEY 800 module

The filter values are as follows:

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode

Mesf n( ) α Mesf n 1–( ) 1 α–( ) Valb n( )×+×=

α

Required efficiency

Value to be selected

corresponding Filter response time at 63%

Cut-off frequency (Hz)

No filtering 0 0 0 0

Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

100 ms202 ms

1,5910,788

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

419 ms851 ms

0,3790,187

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

1,714 ms3,442 ms

0,0930,046

α

27




Required efficiency





Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

178 ms382 ms

0,8940,416

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

791 ms1,607 s

0,2010,099

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

3,239 s6,502 s

0,0490,024

α

28


Displaying measurements

At a Glance The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between: using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/-10 V), parameterizing his display format by indicating the minimum and maximum

values required.

Standardized display

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also symbolized °/ ):

User-defined display

The user can select the value scale (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/ (or -10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum (+ 10000 °/ ).These minimum and maximum limits are integers within the range – 30000 and + 30000.

Example:Let us suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure information on a 4-20mA loop, with 4mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20mA corresponding to 9600 mB. The user can, therefore, select the user-defined format (User), defining the following minimum and maximum limits: 3200 °/ for 3200 mB as minimum limit,9600 °/ for 9600 mB as maximum limit, Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (= 4 mA) and 9600 (= 20 mA).The corresponding values are as follows:

Type of range Display

unipolar range: 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ )

bipolar range:+/-10V

from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/ to +10000 °/ )

°°°

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

Value transmitted to the program

Value of current Value of pressure

3200 4 mA 3200 mB

current value between 4 and 20mA current value

9600 20 mA 9600 mB

°°° °°°°°°

°°°°°°

29


Sensor alignment

At a Glance Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. An error linked to the process is compensated for. For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating point of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Example Let us suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value that must be entered is 3210.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified (See Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel already possesses an alignment.The alignment offset can also be modified by the program.Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

30


Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

At a Glance Calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is performed globally for the module on channel 0. It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel in RUN or STOP modes.

Precautions When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid (%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1), filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened. As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before switching to calibration.

Procedure The following table gives the procedure for calibrating the module:

Step Action

1 Access the calibration adjustment screen.

2 Double click on channel 0.Result: A question appears ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

3 Reply to this question with Yes.Result: The calibration window appears.

4 According to the range to be calibrated, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0: reference voltage = 10 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V and 0..10

V ranges, reference voltage = 5 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20

mA and 4..20 mA ranges.Caution: the 5 V reference is used to calibrate the whole measurement device for the 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA ranges, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated on the current entry.

5 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), use the Reference drop-down list box to slect this value. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. +/-10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

6 Calibrate the module for other ranges, if applicable.the Return to Factory Parameters command button cancels all previous calibrations, and return to the original calibration settings configured in the factory.

7 Press the Save command button, in order to recognize and save the new calibration in the module. If you exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

31


2.2 TSX AEY 810 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the TSX AEY 810 rack-based module.



Topic Page

Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module 33





Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module 42

32


Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module

General The TSX AEY 810 module is a high level 8 input industrial measurement device. Associated to sensors or transmitters, it is used for monitoring, measuring and regulating continuous processes.The TSX AEY 810 module offers the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, according to the selection made in configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183).The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel of the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access the channel command (forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 810 input module supports the following functions:

2 3 57

A/D

Con

nect

or to

X b

us5 V 6

Channel selection

1000 Vrms insulation

41

X busInterface

Processing

Opto-coupler

Opto-coupler

DC/DCConverter

8 in

puts

Sub

D c

onne

ctor

(s)

TSX AEY 810

Filter

Filter

33


Description The table below shows the various functions :


1 Connection to process and scanning of input channels

physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), protection of the module against voltage surges using limiter diodes, adapting input signals using analog filtering, scanning input channels using static multiplexing, inter-channel isolation assured by optical connectors.

2 Adapting input signals

gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined at configuration (unipolar or bipolar range, voltage or current),

compensation for drifts in the amplification string.

3 Digitalization of analog input measurement signals


4 Transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user


filtering (digital filtering) of measurements, based on configuration parameters, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.



6 Module power supply

-



34



At a Glance The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration (See Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module, p. 190) : normal cycle or fast cycle. in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle


Channel scanning cycle

The scanning cycle of channels used in normal cycle is as follows:

The scanning cycle of channels used in fast cycle is as follows:

Note: In fast cycle, filtering is inhibited

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 7 (or 15) Internal ref.

Cycle time

Tv Tv Tv Tv



Channel 3 Channel 5

Tv Tv

Channel 6

Tv Tv

Internal ref.

Cycle time = (3+1)xTv



Example for channels 3, 5, 6

35


Calculating cycle time

The table below gives the values of cycle time according to the cycle used:

Illustration:

Module Normal cycle Fast cycle

TSX AEY 810 29.7 ms (N+1) x 3.3 ms where N = number of channels used.



MAST task time


36



At a Glance The TSX AEY 810 module provides a choice of 6 voltage or current ranges for each of its inputs. For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.This check is optional.Generally speaking, the module will authorize an overshoot of 5% on the positive electrical part of the range.

Measurement zones

The measurement scale is divided into five zones :

the nominal zone is the measurement scale that corresponds to the range selected,

the upper tolerance zone contains the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit,

the lower tolerance zone contains the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit,

the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.


In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk of the user program, error bits are provided:

nominal zoneundershoot zone

overshoot zone

Upper limitLower limit

lower tolerance

zone

Lower valuein range

upper tolerance

zone

Upper valuein range


%IWxy.i.1:X5 Measurement in the lower tolerance zone.

%IWxy.i.1:X6 Measurement in the upper tolerance zone.

%MWxy.i.2:X1 If over/undershoot monitoring is required, this bit signals an over/undershoot fault in the range: %MWxy.i.2:X14 signals an undershoot, %MWxy.i.2:X15 signals an overshoot.

%Ixy.i.ERR Channel fault.

Note: If an over/undershoot occurs, the value measured is limited to value of the corresponding limit.

37


Over/undershoot limit values

The overshoot or undershoot values can be configured (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193) independently of each other. They can take integer values between the following values: Lower limit = Vinf range + lower tolerance zoneUpper limit = Vsup range + upper tolerance zoneThe table below gives the values of the tolerance zones for the different ranges:

Range Lower tolerance zone Upper tolerance zone

- Default value Max. value

Min. value Default value Min. value

Max. value

Bipolar -0.125 x

/2

0 -0.25 x

/2

-0.125 x

/2

0 0.25 x

/2

Unipolar -0.125 x 0 -0.25 x 0.125 x 0 0.25 x

Standardized Bipolar

-1250 0 -2500 1250 0 2500

Standardized Unipolar

-1250 0 -2500 1250 0 2500

User-defined Bipolar

-0.125 x

/2

0 -0.25 x

/2

0.125 x

/2

0 0.25 x

/2

User-defined Unipolar

-0.125 x 0 -0.25 x 0.125 x 0 0.25 x

With = Upper range value - Lower range value,

∆gamme ∆gamme ∆gamme ∆gamme




∆gamme

Note: The bipolar range is range +/-10V, the unipolar ranges are ranges 0..20mA,

0..10V, 0..5V, 1..5V, 4..20mA, By default, overshoot monitoring is active but it can be partially activated (only

for overshoots or undershoots) or deactivated.

38


Example Overshoot for the range 4..20mA in standardized mode on channel 0

1. Undershoot zone2. Lower tolerance zone3. Nominal zone4. Upper tolerance zone5. Overshoot zone

Lower limit : -1250 (2mA) Upper limit = 10625 (21mA)

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 24 mA

1 2 3 4 5Measurement range

Range measurable electronically

%MWxy.0.2:X1

%MWxy.0.2:X14

%MWxy.0.2:X15

%IWxy.0.1:X5

%IWxy.0.1:X6

%Ixy.0.ERR

Upper limit:

Lower limit: 0

1062510000

-12502 mA 4 mA 20 mA 21 mA

39



At a Glance The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog module channels, p. 189).




Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.


The filter values are as follows: .

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.


α

Required efficiency



cut-off frequency (Hz)


Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

104.3 ms224.7 ms

1,5260,708

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

464.8 ms944.9 ms

0,3420,168

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

1,905 ms3,825 ms

0,0840,042

α

40



Introduction The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) between: using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/-10 V), creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and

maximum values required.


The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/ ):

User display The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/ (or -10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum + 10000 °/ .These minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to +30000.

Example:Suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure on a loop of 4-20mA, where 4mA corresponds to 3200mB and 20mA corresponds to 9600mB. The user can, therefore, select the User display format, defining the following minimum and maximum limits: 3200 °/ for 3200 mB as minimum limit,9600 °/ for 9600 mB as maximum limit,Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).The corresponding values are as follows:


unipolar range: 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ ).

bipolar range:+/-10V

from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/ to +10.000 °/ ).

°°°

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

Value transmitted to program


3200 4 mA 3200 mB


9600 20 mA 9600 mB

°°° °°°°°°

°°°°°°

41


Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module

Introduction Calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is performed globally for the module on channel 0. It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.

Precautions When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid (bit %IWxy.i.1:X2 = 1), filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before commencing calibration.

Procedure The following table shows the module calibration procedure:

Step Action


2 Double-click on channel 0.Result: The system asks for confirmation ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.


4 Connect a reference voltage on the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be calibrated: reference voltage = 10 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V and 0..10

V ranges, reference voltage = 5 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20

mA and 4..20 mA ranges.Caution: the reference 5 V is used to recalibrate the whole measurement channel for ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated mounted on the current input.

5 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. +/-10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

6 Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.the Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

7 Click on the Save command button in order to register and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

42



At a Glance





Topic Page






Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module 52

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module 53

43



General The TSX AEY 1614 module is a 16 input thermocouple industrial measurement device.The TSX AEY 1614 module offers the following ranges for each of its inputs according to the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183): Thermocouple: B,E,J,K,L,N,R,S,T or U; Voltage: -80..+80 mV.

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 1614 input module performs the following functions:

Note: The TELEFAST ABE 7 CP A12 connection accessory facilitates connection and provides a cold junction compensation device

2 37

6

41

TSX AEY1614

Opto

Processing X busInterface

Con

nect

or to

X b

us

5

ADC

ADCAcquisition channel

Supply

Supply

Acquisition channel

Mul

tiple

xing

Mul

tiple

xing

Cold junctionTelefast 8

Channels 8 to 15

Cold junctionTelefast 8

Channels0 to 7

Opto

Opto

Opto

44


Description Details of the functions are as follows:


1 Adaptation and multiplexing

Adaptation consists of a common mode and differential mode filter. It is followed by channel multiplexing via opto switches in order to offer the possibility of common mode voltage between channels (up to 400 V). A second multiplexing stage is used to self calibrate the acquisition string offset as close as possible to the input limit, and select the cold junction compensation sensor included in the telefast package.

2 Amplification This is built around a weak offset amplifier. Lopping the amplifier on entry enables it to withstand voltage surges of 30V.

3 Conversion The converter receives the signal coming from an input channel or cold junction

compensation. Conversion is based on a 16 bit converter.



measurement filtering (digital filtering), based on configuration parameters, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.




-



8 Cold junction compensation

integrated into TELEFAST ABE 7CP A12, to be allowed for by the user if TELEFAST is not used.

Σ∆

45



Introduction The cycle time for the TSX AEY 1614 module depends on which cycle is used: normal cycle or fast cycle, defined in configuration (See Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module, p. 190), and the configured options. in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle


Normal cycle Example for a module in which all the options are activated.

Note: The channels are acquired simultaneously in pairs (channel 0 and channel 8, channel 1 and channel 9, …, channel 7 and channel 15).

Wt0 V0 Wt1 V1 V2Wt2 V7Wt7....... TCJC High prec.

Wt8 V8 Wt9 V9 V10Wt10 V15Wt15....... TCJC High prec.

Wt: wiring test (8 ms per channel requesting the test)TCJC: Telefast cold junction compensation (70ms)High prec. : high precision mode (corresponds to a self-calibration procedure of the module) (70ms)

8ms 70ms 8ms 8ms 8ms70ms 70ms 70ms70ms

Module cycle time

46


Fast cycle To reduce the cycle time to the maximum, the system will take account of the fact that the channels are acquired simultaneously in pairs.Example of optimal cabling for 3 channels used with wiring test, Telefast cold junction compensation, and high precision mode:If the user wishes to use only 3 channels and have the minimum cycle time, it is best to connect the dual channels. In this way, there will only be an elementary time for two channels. In our example, the dual channels 0 and 8 and channel 1 are selected.The cycle time is therefore as follows:

Illustration:


2 70ms 2 8ms 70ms 70ms 296ms=+ +×+×

Tf0 V0 Tf1 V1

Tf8 V8 Tf9 V9

CSFT Hte préc.

CSFT Hte préc.

8ms 70ms 8ms 70ms 70ms 70ms

Temps de cycle = 296ms


MAST task time


47



Introduction The TSX AEY 1614 module provides the choice of one voltage range and six thermocouple ranges for each of its inputs.For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193).This check is optional.

Measurement zones

The measurement range is divided into three zones:

the nominal zone is the measurement range corresponding to the range selected,



In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used:

Note: Beyond these limits (in the overshoot or undershoot zones) which correspond to nominal values in the selected range (thermocouple value limits or -80mV and +80mV for the electrical range), there is measurement saturation, even if overshoot monitoring has not been activated.





%MWxy.i.2:X1 Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel

%MWxy.i.2:X14 Indicates a undershoot on the channel

%MWxy.i.2:X15 Indicates an overshoot on the channel

Note: If overshoot monitoring is not activated, all bits described above will remain at zero irrespective of the measurement value.

48


‘Temperature’ range

The range overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic overshoot on the acquisition device or to an overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement zone or to dynamic overshoot of the cold junction compensation temperature (-5 C to +85

C).

°°

49



Introduction The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified (See Modifying the channel filtering value, p. 208) from a programming terminal and by program.



where:=filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.


The filter values are as follows. They are dependent on the cycle time T:



α

Required efficiency



cut-off frequency (Hz)


Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

4 x T8 x T

0.040 / T0.020 / T

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

16 x T32 x T

0.010 / T0.005 / T

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

64 x T128 x T

0.025 / T0.012 / T

α

50



Introduction This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program. It is necessary to differentiate between the electric ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.

Range -80..+80mV

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between standardized and user-defined display formats.

Standardized display:The values are displayed in standardized units (in % to 2 decimal points, also with °/ symbol).

User display:The user can select (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) the range of values within which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the minimum limit of the range (-10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the maximum limit of the range (+10.000°/

).These minimum and maximum limits should be integers between -30000 and +30000.

Thermocouple ranges

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can select (See Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel, p. 187) one of the two types of display: temperature display and standardized display.

Temperature display:The values are supplied in tenths of a degree (Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit selected on configuration).

User display:The user can select standardized display 0..10000 (i.e. 0 to 10000 °/ ), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

Display

from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/ to +10.000 °/

)

°°°

°°°°°°

°°°

°°°

°°°

51


Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module

Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. An error linked to the process is compensated for. For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating point of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified (See Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from a programming terminal, even when the program is in RUN mode. For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.The alignment offset can also be modified by the program.Alignment is performed on the channel during normal operation, without affecting the module channel operating modes.The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed 1500.


Conversion line before alignment

Note: bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel is aligned.

52


Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module

Introduction Calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is performed on channels 0 and 8. On channel 0, two types of calibration are possible: calibration of the measurement string for one channel, calibration of the current source necessary for the measurements from resistive

probe sensors.On channel 8, only calibration of the measurement string is possible.

Recommen-dations

It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.

Procedure for recalibrating the measurement string

The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the measurement string:

Note: in the calibration screen, the values displayed on the left side of the screen (channels 0 et 8) indicate the value measured on the connected voltage reference. The display format in tenths of mV (16000 displayed for 1.6 V) is not intended to monitor the reference precision but simply to indicate the presence of this reference.

Step Action

1 Access the calibration adjustment screen


3 Reply to this question with Yes.Result: The recalibration window appears.

4 Connect a voltage reference to the voltage input to be calibrated, according to the range to be calibrated +25.000mV+/-0.039% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples B, R, S,

and T, +55.000mV+/-0.026% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples U, N, L,

and K, +80.000mV+/-0.023% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples J and E, +166.962mV+/-0.019% for the range Pt100.

5 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. 10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

53


Calibrating the 1.25 mA current source

The current source is used for cold junction compensation. The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the current source:

6 Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.The Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

7 Click on the Save command button in order to take into account and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

Step Action

Step Action




4 Using a precision multimeter (0.068% to 1.25mA), measure the current source value given by the channel to be calibrated.Note this value and convert it into micro-Amps.

5 Use the Reference drop-down list box to select Source.Enter the converted value in the Source field (for example 12501 for 1.2501 mA) then confirm the selection with the OK command button.

6 Click on the Save command button in order to acknowledge and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

54



At a Glance





Topic Page




Sensor link monitoring 61




Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module 66

Calibration 67

55



General The TSX AEY 414 module is a multi-range acquisition device with 4 separately insulated inputs. For each of its inputs, the module offers ranges dependent on the selection made at (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183) configuration: Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U, Voltage: -13..+63 mV, Thermowell Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000 with 2 or 4 wires, or an ohmic range of: 0..400

Ohms, 0..3850 Ohms, High level +/-10 V, 0..10 V, +/- 5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA with external shunt) or 1..5

V (4..20 mA with external shunt). It should be noted that the external shunts are supplied with the product.

Structural diagram


Note: The terminal block is supplied separately under the reference TSX BLY 01.

A/D

Con

nect

or to

X b

usProcessing

Opto-coupler

5 V

Function

1

2 3 4

5

6

Opto-couplers

Opto-couplers

Opto-couplers


Opto-couplers

20 p

in s

crew

term

inal

blo

ck

Mul

tiple

xer


Measurement of the internal temperature

DC / DC convertercouplers

1

X busInterface

TSX AEY 414

56




1 Connection to process and scanning of input channels

physical connection to the process via a screw terminal block, gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined in configuration

for each channel (high-level range, thermocouple or thermowell), multiplexing.

2 Digitization of analog input measurement signals

Digitization of analog input measurement signals


consideration of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements (channel-by-channel and range-by-range), as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module,

linearization of the measurement provided by the Pt or Ni thermowells, linearization of measurement and adjustment for internal or external cold

junction compensation in the case of thermocouples, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters (in physical units

or user-defined range).




-


testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, sensor link test (except for the ranges +/-10 V, 0..10V, +/-5 V, 0..5V (0..20mA)), watchdog test.

57



Introduction The cycle length for the TSX AEY 414 module is always 550 ms.This time is independent of the mains frequency (50Hz or 60Hz). The measurements are linked in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and internal selection.

Breakdown of the cycle time

The table below breaks down the different times:

Illustration

Type of time Breakdown of times Total

Scanning time for channel 0

Wiring test: 4 ms, Channel conversion: 106 ms.

110 ms



110 ms



110 ms



110 ms



110 ms

Internal selection Internal selection: 110 ms. 110 ms

TOTAL 550 ms

Note: The internal selection corresponds to the internal temperature, internal references for the self-calibration of the module or to the line compensation for thermowell ranges.

110 ms 110 ms

Tconv Ttf Tconv Tconv

Channel 0 Channel 1 Internal selection

The cycle is always performed in the same way and lasts 550 ms.

58



Introduction The TSX AEY 414 module provides a choice of voltage ranges, thermocouple ranges and thermowell ranges for each input.For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.

Measurement zones





In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used:

Voltage range overshoot values

When using voltage ranges, 5% overshoot of the positive electric part of the range is authorized by the module.Table of values:



Bit name Meaning (when equal to 1)


%IWxy.channel.2:X1 Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel

Range Lower limit Upper limit Default values Minimum limit in User mode

Maximum limit in User mode

+/-10 V -10.5 V +10.5 V +/- 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min)/2 Max + 5%(Max-Min)/2

0..10 V -0.5 V +10.5 V -500..+ 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

+/-5 V -5.25 V +5.25 V +/- 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

0..5 V -0.25 V +5.25 V -500..+ 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

1..5 V +0.8 V +5.2 V -500..+ 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

0..20 mA -1 mA +21 mA -500..+ 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

4..20 mA +3.2 mA +20.8 mA -500..+ 10500 Min - 5%(Max-Min) Max + 5%(Max-Min)

59


Thermal range overshoot values

The range overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic overshoot on the acquisition device or to an overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement zone or to dynamic overshoot of the compensation temperature (-5 C to +85 C). Use of

internal compensation at standard ambient temperature (0 C to +60 C) is

compatible with the thresholds -5 C to +85 C.Table of values:

° °° °

° °

Range Lower limit Upper limit Default values Minimum limit in User mode

Maximum limit in User mode

Thermo B 0 C (32 F) +1802 C (+3276 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo E -270 C (-454 F) +812 C (+1495 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo J -210 C (-346 F) +1065 C (+1953 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo K -210 C (-454 F) +1372 C (+2502 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo L -200 C (-328 F) +900 C (+1652 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo N -270 C (-454 F) +1300 C (+2372 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo R -50 C (-58 F) +1769 C (+3216 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo S -50 C (-58 F) +1769 C (+3216 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo T -270 C (-454 F) +400 C (+752 F) C or F 0 +10000

Thermo U -200 C (-328 F) +600 C (+1112 F) C or F 0 +10000

Pt100 -200 C (-328 F) +850 C (+1562 F) C or F 0 +10000

Pt1000 -200 C (-328 F) +800 C (+1472 F) C or F 0 +10000

Ni1000 -60 °C (-76 °F) +240 °C (+464 °F) C or F 0 +10000

-13..+63 mV -13 mV +63 mV -2064..+ 10000 Min Max

0..400 0 400 0..+10000 Min Max

0..3850 0 3850 0..+10000 Min Max

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° ° ° ° ° °

° °

Ω Ω

Ω Ω

60


Sensor link monitoring

Resistance values

Sensor link monitoring imposes a maximal value on the resistance Rs of the sensors connected to the module’s inputs. This value Rs max. is compatible with normal operation of the TSX AEY 414 module.The sensor link fault may correspond to a short-circuit or an open circuit depending on the type of sensor used. On the other hand, the report is global and doesn’t differentiate between a short-circuit and an open circuit.Table of resistance values:

Sensors Thermowells Pt1000/Ni1000

Thermowells Pt100

Thermocouples -15/60 mV, B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U

Rs max. - 0 100 ohms

Open circuit >3850 ohms >400 ohms 100000 ohms

Short-circuit 150 ohms 15 ohms undetectable

Note: The module manages consistency between the terminal block fault and the

sensor link fault, A sensor link fault is not detected in the range 0-5 V / 0-20 mA (the service is

not offered to the user and the wiring test is not executed), In the range 1-5 V / 4-20 mA the wiring test is only effective if the 250 W shunt

is connected. If this is not the case (the shunt is not connected), the wiring test cannot detect a fault, even if the cables are cut,

With thermowells, a sensor link fault caused by an anomaly in line compensation can appear or disappear with a maximum delay of 12 s, in relation to the occurrence of the anomaly.

61



Introduction The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be changed (See Modifying the channel filtering value, p. 208) from the PL7 screen and by program.



where:=filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.On configuration, the user selects the filtering value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.





α

Required efficiency





Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

1.91 s4.12 s

0,0830,039

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

8.45 s17.5 s

0,0190,0091

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

34.1 s68.5 s

0,00460,0022

α

62



Introduction This process is used to select the display format in which the data is supplied to the user-program. It is necessary to distinguish between electrical ranges and thermocouple or thermowell ranges:

Standardized display of electrical ranges

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % to 2 decimal points, also with °/ symbol)

User-defined display

The user can select the range of values (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) within which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the minimumrange value: 0 °/ ) (or -10000

°/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the maximum range value +10.000 °/ . The minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to +30000.

Example:Let us suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure information on a 4-20mA loop, with 4mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20mA corresponding to 9600 mB. The user can, therefore, select the user-defined format (User), defining the following minimum and maximum limits: 3200 °/ for 3200 mB as minimum limit,9600 °/ for 9600 mB as maximum limit,Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).The corresponding values are as follows:


unipolar range from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to +10.000 °/ )

bipolar range from -10000 to 10000 (-10000 °/ to +10000 °/ )

°°°

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

Value transmitted to the program


3200 4 mA 3200 mB


9600 20 mA 9600 mB

°°°°°°

°°°

°°°°°°

63


Displaying thermal ranges

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose (See Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel, p. 187) between standardized and temperature display formats. With the temperature display format, values are given in tenths of a degree

Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit selected. With user display, the user can select standardized display 0..10000 (or 0 to

10000 °/ ) by specifying minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

°°°

64



Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. Alignment provides compensation for errors linked to the process, not to the equipment. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or modification of the operating point of an existing sensor will require realignment.

Illustration The conversion process is as follows:

Example Suppose that a Pt100 probe, immersed in melting ice (procedure for adjustment of probes) indicates a a temperature of 10 °C (and not 0 °C) after measurement and display. The user can align the measurement to the value 0 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply an offset of -10 systematically for any new measurement.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified (See Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from a programming terminal, even when the program is in RUN mode.For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.The alignment offset can also be modified by the program. Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes.The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed +/-1000.


Conversion line before alignment

65


Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module

Definition For thermocouple ranges, the module provides cold junction compensation.However, the cold junction temperature can be measured either on the module terminal block (by a probe inside the module), or remotely by using an external class A Pt100 probe (not supplied) connected to channel 0 of the module (See Cold junction compensation, p. 194).

66


Calibration

Introduction Module calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is used to correct long-term drifts in the module, and to optimize precision at ambient temperatures other than 25 ºC. The TSX AEY414 module is calibrated channel by channel.

Important The calibration dynamic is limited to 1% of the full scale, as above this level the module considers there to be an acquisition channel anomaly.Full scale calibration is done on each of the channels and in each of the ranges by placing a calibration source directly on the input terminal block.

Procedure for a voltage input

This procedure is performed from the recalibration screen

Procedure for thermowell current source

This procedure is performed from the calibration screen

Step Action


2 Select a channel and switch to calibration mode.

3 Connect a voltage reference to the voltage input to be calibrated, according to the range to be calibrated +10.000mV +/-0.018% for voltage ranges, +60.000mV +/-0.028% for thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U and

the range 13..63 mV, +2.500mV +/-0.016% for the Pt100, Pt1000 Ni1000 thermowell ranges.

4 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input, select the reference value from the drop-down list.

5 Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the "Confirm" button. The ranges linked to this reference are then calibrated automatically.

Step Action


2 Select a channel and switch to calibration mode.

3 Connect a reference current channel-by-channel in order to calibrate. +2.5mA +/-0.0328% for thermowell ranges.

4 Read the value supplied, and give this value in units of x 100 nA.

67


Acknowledgment The calibration value is not acknowledged until it has been saved in the module using the "Save" button.The "Return to Factory Parameters" button cancels all previous calibrations, and restores the module to its initial calibration (factory settings).Selecting this button triggers a confirmation message. On the other hand, after confirmation, acknowledgment is immediate and does not need to be saved.Leaving the screen without saving triggers a message which will remind the user that the save has not been performed. If the user chooses to exit the screen anyway, the new calibration coefficients are lost (the former values are restored).

Note: For the calibration voltages 10 v and 2.5 V, the expected read value after

calibration is 10000 +/-2, For 60 mV calibration, the expected read value is 9523 +/-2 (10000 corresponds

to the full scale, i.e. 63mV).

68



At a Glance





Topic Page




Thresholds and Event Processing 75



69



General The TSX AEY 420 module is an industrial measurement device comprising 4 high-level fast inputs.Associated to sensors or transmitters, they support surveillance, measurement and regulation functions for continuous processes.The TSX AEY 420 module supports the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, according to the selection made on configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183).

Structural diagram


A/D

Con

nect

or to

X b

us5 V

6


1

ProcessingOpto-coupler

Filter

4 in

puts

Sub

D c

onne

ctor

(s)

2 3 4

7

Filter

5

Opto-coupler

DC/DCConverter

Channel selection

8

Internal reference 9

Inte

rfac

eX

bus

Mul

tiple

xing

TSX AEY 420

70


Description The table below shows the various functions :


1 Connection to the input channel process and scanning

physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), adapting input signals using analog filtering.

2 Multiplexing input signals

scanning input channels using static multiplexing.

3 Adapting input signals

Adapting input signals.

4 Digitization of analog input measurement signals




scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.





testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, watchdog test.

9 Internal reference An internal calibration reference voltage is used by the module to calculate its self-calibration coefficients.

71



Introduction The cycle length for the TSX AEY 420 module is 1 ms when no event processing is activated. It is independent of the number of input channels used.The measurements are sequenced as follows: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2 and channel 3.The scanning cycle is prolonged by 0.150 ms per channel if event processing is activated.


The table below gives the different cycle times

Illustration

Configuration Cycle time

No event processing 1 ms

1 channel with event processing 1.15 ms

2 channels with event processing 1.30 ms



Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

Cycle time independent of the number of inputs used

72



Introduction The TSX AEY 420 module provides a choice of 6 voltage or current ranges for each of its inputs.For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.This check is optional.Generally speaking, the module will authorize an overshoot of 5% on the positive electrical part of the range.

Measurement zones

The measurement range is divided into five zones:


the upper tolerance zone comprises the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit,

the lower tolerance zone comprises the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit,


nominal zoneundershoot zone

overshoot zone


lower tolerance

zone

Lower valuein range

upper tolerance

zone

Upper valuein range

73



In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used: .

Over/undershoot limit values

The overshoot or undershoot values can be configured (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193) independently of each other. They can take integer values between the following values:

With = Upper range value - lower range value,

Bit name Meaning (when =1)

%IWxy.i.1:X5 The value read is in the lower tolerance zone.

%IWxy.i.1:X6 The value read is in the upper tolerance zone.

%IWxy.i.2:X1 If overshoot monitoring is required, this bit signals that the value read is in one of the two overshoot zones. %MWxy.i.2:X14 signals an undershoot in the lower zone, %MWxy.i.2:X15 signals an overshoot in the upper zone.

%Ixy.ERR Channel fault.

Note: If an overshoot occurs, the value measured is limited to the corresponding limit value.

Range Lower tolerance zone Upper tolerance zone

- Default value

Max. value

Min. value Default value Min. value

Max. value

Bipolar+/-10V

-0.125 x

/2

0 -0.25 x

/2

0.125 x

/2

0 0.25 x

/2

Unipolar0..10V,0..5V,1..5V,0..20mA,4..20mA

-0.125 x 0 -0.25 x 0.125 x 0 0.25 x

Standardized -1250 0 -2500 1250 0 2500

User-defined Bipolar+/-10V

-0.125 x

/2

0 -0.25 x

/2

0.125 x

/2

0 0.25 x

/2

User-defined Unipolar0..10V,0..5V,1..5V,0..20mA,4..20mA

-0.125 x 0 -0.25 x 0.125 x 0 0.25 x





∆gamme

74


Thresholds and Event Processing

At a Glance The TSX AEY 420 module manages 2 thresholds per channel (threshold 0 and 1).When these thresholds are crossed, the module can trigger an event processing operation.

Event causes The user assigns an event processing operation to an analog channel when configuring the module software (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193). The event can be raised in a variety of ways:

Masking event triggers

These triggers can be masked or enabled by program using %Qwxy.i word bits.

Event source The source of the event is indicated by %Iwxy.i.2 word bits:

the measurement taken is lower than threshold 0

the measurement taken is higher than threshold 0

the measurement taken is lower than threshold 1

the measurement taken is higher than threshold 1

Address Function (0 = masking, 1 = enabling)

%QWxy.i:X 0 Rising threshold 0 crossing

%QWxy.i:X 1 Descending threshold 0 crossing

%QWxy.i:X 2 Rising threshold 1 crossing

%QWxy.i:X 3 Descending threshold 1 crossing

Address Function (1= event, 0= no event)

%IWxy.i.2:X0 Rising threshold 0 crossing

%IWxy.i.2:X1 Descending threshold 0 crossing

%IWxy.i.2:X2 Rising threshold 1 crossing

%IWxy.i.2:X3 Descending threshold 1 crossing

75


Example

Additional information

The %Iwxy.i.2 input word is only updated each time a new event is raised. When the value measured is equal to the threshold but does not exceed it, no

event is raised. The event processing operation can be activated or deactivated by configuring

each channel accordingly. An event number (0 to 63) is assigned to each channel. The number selected

determines the event priority (0=maximum priority, 1 to 63=minimum priority).

Threshold 1

%QWxy.0:X0

%QWxy.0:X1

%QWxy.0:X3

%QWxy.0:X2

Threshold 0

%IWxy.0.2:X0

%IWxy.0.2:X1

%IWxy.0.2:X2

%IWxy.0.2:X3

Evt

Evt

Evt

Evt

76



Introduction The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between: using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/ 10 V), creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and

maximum values required.


The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/ ).

User display The user can select the value range (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 °/ (or -10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum +10000 °/ . These minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to +30000.

Example:Suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure on a loop of 4-20mA, where 4mA corresponds to 3200mB and 20mA corresponds to 9600mB. The user can, therefore, select the User display format, defining the following minimum and maximum limits: 3200 °/ for 3200 mB as minimum limit,9600 °/ for 9600 mB as maximum limit, Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).The corresponding values are as follows:


unipolar range from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to +10.000 °/ ).

bipolar range from -10000 to 10000 (-10000 °/ to +10000 °/ ).

°°°

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

Value transmitted to program


3200 4 mA 3200 mB


9600 20 mA 9600 mB

°°° °°°°°°

°°°°°°

77



Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor with respect to a given operating parameter. The system compensates an error linked to the process. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or a change of operating parameter of an existing sensor will require realignment.

Illustration The conversion process is as follows:

Example For example, supposing that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, while the actual pressure is 3210 mB. The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10 on any new measurement. The alignment value which must be entered is 3210.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified (See Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from the PL7 screens, even when the program is in RUN mode.For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.The alignment offset can also be modified by program.Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel function modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed 1000.The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.



Note: bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel has been aligned.

78


2.6 TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules

At a Glance


This section introduces the TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 rack modules.



Topic Page

Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module 80

Characteristics of the outputs 82

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module 83

Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs 85

Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module 86

Output characteristics 88

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module 89

Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module 90

79


Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module

General The TSX ASY 410 module comprises 4 separately insulated analog outputs. Depending on the selection made at configuration, (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183) for each of its inputs, the module offers ranges: +/-10V, 0..20 mA, 4..20 mA.

Overview The TSX ASY 410 output module performs the following functions:

Con

nect

or to

X b

us

Processing

5 V

Function23

6

7

Opto-couplers

Opto-couplers

20 pulse screw term

inal block

DC / DC convertercouplers

1

N/A

Insulation 1500 Vrms

Opto-couplers N/A

Opto-couplers N/A

Opto-couplers N/A

45

Voltage / Current

TSX ASY 410

X bus interface

80



Output updating The maximum time between the output value being sent to the PLC bus and its final positioning on the terminal block is 2.5 ms.Outputs can be individually assigned to the MAST or FAST tasks of the application program.

Output writing The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: -10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V, 0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.These values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 3 for channels 0 to 3 of the module.

Address Function Characteristics

1 Link to process physical link to the process via a 20-pin screw terminal block, Protection of the module against voltage surges.

2 Adapting to different actuators Adaptation is performed in terms of voltage or current.

3 Conversion of digital data into analog signals

conversion is performed over 11 bits with sign (-2048 to 2047), data supplied by the program is recentered automatically in the

converter dynamic,

4 Transformation of application values to data that can be used by the digital/analog converter

-

5 Communication interface with application

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receipt of module and channel configuration parameters from

the application, as well as digital channel setpoints, transmission of module status to the application.


7 Module surveillance and notification of possible errors on the application

converter test, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

8 24V external supply for outputs -

81


Characteristics of the outputs

Output writing The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: -10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V, 0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.The values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 3 for channels 0 to 3 of the module.

Digital / analog conversion

Digital / analog conversion is performed on: 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047).Re-scaling of the data, provided by the program, in the converter dynamics is done automatically

Forcing outputs Each output can be forced using the PLC Debugging screen to a value between 10000 and +10000, defined by the user. This function is essentially dedicated to testing the wiring system.Forcing cannot be accessed unless the program task which controls the outputs is in RUN mode (with the output in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task is in STOP mode).

82


Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module

Introduction The type of under/overshoot monitoring on the TSX ASY 410 module depends on the software version (the software version is indicated on the module reference label, affixed to the side panel of the product, or accessible via PL7 in connected mode).

For modules with the SV<=1.0 software version

If the values given by the application are less that –10000 or greater than +10000, the outputs saturate at the following value: -10 V or +10 V in range +/-10 V, 4 mA or 20 mA in range 4..20 mA, 0 mA or 20 mA in range 0..20 mA.An overshoot fault is signaled by the following bits (usable by the program):

For modules with the SV>=2.0 software version

These modules allow an over/undershoot of: +/-5 % on voltage ranges and 4..20 mA, +5 % on the range 0..20 mA.The measurement range is divided into three zones:

the nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected,

the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit. Overshoot values in relation to range:

Bit name Meaning

%Ixy.i.ERR When = 1, Indicates a channel error.

%IWxy.i.2:X1 When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel.

Range Lower limit Upper limit

+/-10V -10500 (i.e. –10.5 V) +10500 (i.e. +10.5 V).

0..20mA 0 (i.e. 0mA) +10500 (i.e. +21 mA).

4..20mA -500 (i.e. 3.2 mA) +10500 (i.e. +20.8 mA).



83


Range overshoot detection is optional:The user can select (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193) whether overshoot, undershoot or both are to be indicated.When the value sent is outside the over/undershoot limits and the over/undershoot monitor is requested, the over/undershoots are signaled by the following bits:

Address Meaning

%Ixy.i.ERR When = 1, Indicates a channel error

%MWxy.i.2:X1 When = 1, Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel. %MWxy.i.2:X3 = 1 indicates overshoot by a greater value, %MWxy.i.2:X3 = 0 indicates undershoot by a lower value.

84


Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs

Fallback/Maintain or clearing outputs

When a fault occurs, depending on the gravity of the fault, the outputs shift individually or as a group to the Fallback/Maintain position or they are forced to 0 (0 V or 0 mA).Different cases of output behavior:

Fallback or maintain at the current value is selected on configuration of the module. The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Debugging (See Modifying the fallback value of an output, p. 212) screen or by program.

Fault Voltage output behavior Current output behavior

Task in STOP mode or program missing

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)


Communication fault Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)


Configuration fault 0V (channel by channel) 0mA (channel by channel)

Internal module fault 0V (channel by channel) 0mA (channel by channel)

Output value outside limits (range overshoot)Software version>=2.0

Value transmitted with saturation to +10.5/-10.5V (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to 3.2/20.8 mA or 0/20mA

Output value outside limits (range overshoot)Software version=1.0

+10V/-10V 4/20 mA or 0/20mA

Terminal block fault Value maintain (all channels) Value maintain (all channels)

Plugging in on power-upProcessor in STOP mode

Outputs to 0 (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

Reloading program 0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

85


Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module

General The TSX ASY 800 module comprises 8 non-insulated analog outputs. Depending on the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183), for each of its inputs, the module offers ranges: +/-10V, 0..20 mA, 4..20 mA.

Overview The TSX ASY 800 output module performs the following functions:

5

TSX ASY 800

20 p

in s

crew

term

inal

blo

ck

Con

nect

or to

X b

us

X b

usIn

terf

ace

Processing

Opto-coupler

Opto-coupler

DC/DCConverter

D/A

Mul

tiple

xer

exte

rnal

24

V6

4 3 2 1

8

7

86



Output refresh period

The maximum time between the output value being sent to the PLC bus and its final positioning on the terminal block is 5 ms.

Action on external supply fault on outputs

If there is an external supply fault on the outputs, all outputs on the TSX ASY 800 module are set to 0.

Output writing The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: -10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V, 0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.These values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 7 for channels 0 to 7 of the module.


1 Link to process physical connection to the process via a 25 pin SubD connector, protection of the module against voltage surges.

2 Adapting to different actuators Adaptation is performed in terms of voltage or current.

3 Conversion of digital data into analog signals

in terms of voltage, conversion is performed on 13 bits sign + (-8192 to +8191),

in terms of current, conversion is performed on 13 bits (0 to +8191).

4 Transformation of application values to data that can be used by the digital/analog converter

-

5 Communication interface with application

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, reception of module and channel configuration parameters from

the application, as well as digital channel setpoints, transmission of module status to the application.


7 Module surveillance and notification of possible errors to the application

converter test, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

8 24V external supply for outputs -

Note: When the module has both an external supply fault and a terminal block fault, only the supply fault is signaled.

87


Output characteristics

Writing output The application must provide values in a standardized format to the outputs: -10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V, 0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.The values must be written in the words %QWxy.i.0 to 7 for channels 0 to 7 in the module.

Digital / analog conversion

Digital / analog conversion is carried out on: 13 bits + sign (-8192 to +8191) in voltage, 13 bits (0 to +8191) in current.Re-scaling of the data, provided by the program, in the converter dynamics is done automatically.

Forcing the outputs

From the PL7 Debugging screen, each output can be forced to a value between –10000 and +10000, as defined by the user. Essentially, this function is dedicated to testing the wiring.Forcing can only be accessed if the program task controlling the output is in RUN mode (the output being in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task in STOP mode).

What happens with an output external supply fault

With output external supply fault all the module outputs switch to 0.

Note: When the module has an external supply fault and a terminal block fault at the same time, only the supply fault is signaled.

88


Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module

Introduction The TSX ASY 800 module supports an under/overshoot of +/-5% on the voltage ranges and 4..20mA and +5% on the current range.Under/overshoot detection is optional.

Measurement zones


the nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected,


Overshoot indications

The overshoot or undershoot values for different ranges are as follows:

The user can select (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193)whether overshoot, undershoot or both are to be indicated.When the overshoot control is requested, the following bits signal the indications:




+/-10V -10500 (i.e. –10.5 V) +10500 (i.e. +10.5 V)

0..20mA 0 (i.e. 0mA) +10500 (i.e. +21 mA)

4..20mA -500 (i.e. 3.2 mA) +10500 (i.e. +20.8 mA)

Bit name Meaning

%Ixy.i.ERR When = 1, Indicates a channel error

%MWxy.i.2:X1 When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel. %MWxy.i.2:X3 = 1 indicates overshoot by a greater value, %MWxy.i.2:X3 = 0 indicates undershoot by a lower value.

89


Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module

Fallback/Maintain or clearing outputs

When a fault occurs, depending on the gravity of the fault, the outputs shift individually or as a group to the Fallback/Maintain position or they are forced to 0 (0 V or 0 mA).Different cases of output behavior:

Fallback or maintain at the current value is selected on configuration of the module. The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Debugging (See Modifying the fallback value of an output, p. 212) screen or by program.

Behavior on power-up

On power-up of the module (powering up the rack or plugging in on power-up), the outputs are fixed at 0V/0mA for one second before becoming operational.This time period is needed to stabilize the output power supply.

Fault Voltage output behavior Current output behavior

Task in STOP mode or program missing



Communication fault Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)


Configuration fault 0V (channel by channel) 0mA (channel by channel)

Internal module fault 0V (channel by channel) 0mA (channel by channel)

Output value outside limits (range overshoot)

Value transmitted with saturation to +10.5/-10.5V (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to 3.2/20.8 mA or 0/20mA

Terminal block fault Value maintain (all channels) Value maintain (all channels)

Plugging in on power-upProcessor in STOP mode

Outputs to 0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

Reloading program 0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

90

3
The remote analog TBX modules
At a Glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter introduces the remote analog TBX modules.



Section Topic Page

3.1 TBX AES 400 Module 92

3.2 TBX AMS 620 Module 104

3.3 TBX ASS 200 Module 117

91

analog TBXs

3.1 TBX AES 400 Module

At a Glance

What’s in this section?

This section introduces the TBX AES 400 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the TBX AES 400 module 93





Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module 101

Sensor alignment 103

92

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX AES 400 module

General The TBX AES 400 base is an analog input module containing 4 insulated multiple range channels. It must be connected to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.This module supports the following ranges on each input: High-level voltage, High-level current, Thermocouples (B, E ,J, K, N, R, S, T), Thermowells (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000).

Overview TBX AES 400 input module connected to the TBX LEP 030 :

Measure

Analog/DigitalConversion

FIP

IO

Cold junction temperature

TimeBase

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Supply

Processes (in chronological order:-range selection-overshoot-sensor check-filtering-linearization-display

bus

inte

rfac

e24/48V

13

Channel Channel 0

4 5 76

2

93

analog TBXs

Description The TBX AES 400 module connected to the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:

Address Function

1 acquisition by relay multiplexing of the 4 channels with 50 Hz or 60 Hz rejection,

2 12 bit + sign analog digital conversion,

3 range selection for each input: voltage, current or thermocouple,

4 input under/overshoot check,

5 sensor check,

6 measurement filtering, linearization and cold junction compensation for thermocouples, linearization for thermowells,

7 user-defined measurement formatting.

94

analog TBXs


Introduction The cycle length (time) for the TBX AES 400 module depends on the electricity network frequency (50Hz or 60Hz) and therefore on the rejection mode selected upon configuration.The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 then acquisition of the module’s cold junction temperature.


Illustration of the cycle time

The table below shows the various terms of the calculation.

Type of time 50 Hz rejection 60 Hz rejection

Scanning time for a channel 80 ms 68 ms

Acquisition time for the cold junction temperature

80 ms 68 ms

Acquisition time for a complete cycle 400 ms 340 ms

Note: The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use, The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends

on the transmission times on the FIPIO bus and on the PLC task period.

Channel 0Channel 1

Channel 2 T cjChannel 3

Channel 0 Channel 2Channel 1 Channel 3

T cj

T channel

T cycle

T cj: time to acquire the cold junction temperature

95

analog TBXs


Introduction The TBX AES 400 module provides a choice of voltage ranges, current ranges, thermocouple ranges and thermowell ranges for each input.The module checks for an under/overshoot corresponding to the selected range: it checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit.

Measurement zone

The measurement range is divided into five zones:

The nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected,

the upper tolerance zone contains the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit,

the lower tolerance zone contains the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit,


Under/overshoot indications

If the values supplied by the application fall outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded and under/overshoot is indicated by:The module continues to supply the converted value until saturation of the converter or of the display format (+32767/-32768), even though the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.The user can use the under/overshoot bit as a means of eliminating these measurements.Under/overshoot bit:

Electrical range under/overshoot values

For voltage ranges, the module allows an overshoot of 5% on the positive part of the range.

nominal zone

undershoot zone

overshoot zone

overshootlimit

undershootlimit

Lower tolerance

zone

Upper tolerance

zone

Address Meaning

%I\p.2.c\m.i.ERR When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel

96

analog TBXs

Electrical ranges:

Thermal range under/overshoot values

The range under/overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic under/overshoot of the acquisition string or to an under/overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement zone or to dynamic under/overshoot of the compensation temperature (-5 C to +85

C). Use of internal compensation for standard ambient temperatures (0 C to +60

C) is compatible with the -5 C to +85 C thresholds.Thermocouple ranges:

Thermowell range:


+/-10 V -10.5 V +10.5 V

+/-5 V -5.25 V +5.25 V

0..20 mA -1 mA +21 mA

4..20 mA +3.2 mA +20.8 mA

-20..+20 mV -21 mV +21 mV

-50..+50 mV -52.5 mV +52.5 mV

-200..+200 mV -210 mV +210 mV

-500..+500 mV -525 mV +525 mV


Thermo B 0 C (32 F) +1802 C (+3276 F)

Thermo E -270 C (-454 F) +717 C (+1322 F)

Thermo J -210 C (-346 F) +935 C (+1715 F)

Thermo K -270 C (-454 F) +1338 C (+2440 F)

Thermo N -270 C (-454 F) +1300 C (+2372 F)

Thermo R -50 C (-58 F) +1769 C (+3216 F)

Thermo S -50 C (-58 F) +1769 C (+3216 F)

Thermo T -270 C (-454 F) +400 C (+752 F)


Pt100 -200 C (-328 F) +850 C (+1562 F)

Pt1000 -200 C (-328 F) +850 C (+1562 F)

Ni1000 -60 C (-76 F) +250 C (+482 F)

°° °° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

° ° ° °

97

analog TBXs


Introduction The system uses first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog module channels, p. 189).




Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.On configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values.

Values for the TBX AEY 400 module

The filter values are as follows. They are dependent on the power voltage:


α

Efficiency Corresponding

value Rejection time constant at 50 Hz

Rejection time constant at 60 Hz


Low filtering 12

0,7500,875

1.6 s3.2 s

1.4s2.7s

Medium filtering 34

0,9370,969

6.4 s12.8 s

5.4 s10.8 s

High filtering 56

0,9840,992

25.6 s51.2 s

21.1 s43.5 s

α

98

analog TBXs


Introduction This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.It is necessary to differentiate between the electric ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.



User-defined display of electrical ranges

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/ .The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.

Example:Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display: for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.Illustration


unipolar range0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ )

bipolar range+/-10V

from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/ to +10.000 °/

)

°°°

°°° °°°

°°°°°°

°°°°°°

Pressure

20.000 bars

2.000 bars

Current20 mA

99

analog TBXs

Displaying thermocouple and thermowell ranges

With the temperature display format, values are provided in tenths of a degree.With user display, the user can select standardized display 0..10000 by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between standardized and temperature display formats.

Example:Thermocouple J connected to a TBX AES 400 module. The user wishes to monitor a temperature range from 200 °C to 600 °C and obtain a result expressed as a percentage of the dynamic range.In order to do this, select a standardized display format and define the limits: lower limit = 2000, upper limit = 6000.The measurement accessible by program then falls between 0 and 10000.For a temperature of 400°C, the module supplies a digital value equal to 5000 as the measurement, i.e. 50 % of the input dynamic range.Illustration:

100.00

50.00

400 600 T in degrees Celsius200

%

0

Displayed measurement value

100

analog TBXs

Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module

Introduction Calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is performed globally for the module on channel 0.It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.Calibration consists of two steps: calibration of the zero value, full scale calibration.

Calibration of the zero value

Calibration of the zero value is recommended for ranges +/-20mV, +/-50mV and thermocouple ranges. It involves simultaneously calibrating the zero value of each channel in range +/- 20 mV to the required ambient temperature by placing shunts directly on the input limits of the base unit.

Full scale calibration

Full scale calibration is performed on channel 0 by placing the adjusted calibration source at full scale +/-0,01% directly on the input limits of channel 0 of the base unit.

Precautions When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid, filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before commencing calibration.

How to calibrate the module

The following table shows the module calibration procedure:

Step Action



3 Place a shunt on all the module inputs to perform calibration at 0.

4 Reply Yes to the previous question (reply No to avoid performing calibration at 0).Result: The calibration window appears.

101

analog TBXs

5 Perform full scale calibration.Connect a reference voltage on the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be calibrated: reference voltage = 10 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module

on ranges 10 V and 0..10 V, reference voltage = 5 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module

on ranges 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, reference voltage = 2 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module

on ranges Pt1000 and Ni1000, reference voltage = 500 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the

module on range 500 mV, reference voltage = 200 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the

module on ranges Pt100 and +/- 200 mV, reference voltage = 50 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module

on ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples E, J, K and N, reference voltage = 20 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module

on ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples B, R, S and T.Caution: the reference 5 V is used to recalibrate the whole measurement channel for ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated on the current entry.

6 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. 10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

7 Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.the Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

8 Click on the Save command button in order to take into account and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

Step Action

102

analog TBXs

Sensor alignment

Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor in relation to a given operating parameter. The system compensates an error linked to the process. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or modification of the operating parameter of this sensor will require realignment.

Example Supposing that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value which must be entered is 3210.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be changed (See Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.The alignment offset can also be modified by program.Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed 1000.The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.



103

analog TBXs

3.2 TBX AMS 620 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the TBX AMS 620 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module 105

Timing of measurements on inputs 108

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs 109

Filtering of measurements on inputs 110

Displaying measurements on inputs 111

Characteristics of the outputs 112

Fault handling 113

Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs 114

Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module 115

Sensor alignment 116

104

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module

General The TBX AMS 620 base unit is an analog output module containing 6 high-level non-insulated channels and 2 insulated outputs. It must be associated to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.

This module supports the following ranges on each input : High-level voltage, High-level current.

This module supports the following ranges on each output : High-level voltage, High-level current.

105

analog TBXs

Overview Overview of the TBX AMS 620 module associated to the TBX LEP 030 communicator:

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Output 0

Output 1

24/48V

Timebase

AnalogDigitalconversion

Processes:- range selection- overshoot- filtering- display

FIPIO

Channel 7

Channel 6

DigitalAnalogconversion

Processes:- refreshing- error handling- range selection

Bus interface

processor

Supply

Channel 1Channel 0

Channel 7Channel 6

1 23

4 56

78910

106

analog TBXs

Description The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following input functions :

The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following output functions:

Address Function

1 acquisition of the 6 channels using multiplexing,

2 12 bit + sign analog digital conversion,

3 range selection for each input: voltage, current, thermocouple,

4 input under/overshoot monitoring,

5 measurement filtering,

6 user-defined measurement formatting.

Address Function

7 refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor,

8 processing PLC dialog faults,

9 range selection for each output: voltage, current,

10 digital analog conversion.

107

analog TBXs

Timing of measurements on inputs

Introduction The cycle time for the TBX AMS 620 module is fixed at 42.4 ms.The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, channel 4, channel 5 then acquisition of two internal reference voltage channels, required for cyclical calibration.


Scanning time values:

Illustration:

Type of time Time

Scanning time for a channel 5.3 ms,

Acquisition time for a complete cycle 42.4 ms.

Note: The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use, The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends

on the transmission times on the FIPIO bus and on the PLC task period.

Channel 0Channel 1

Channel 2 Int. channel

Int. channel

Channel 0Channel 3

Channel 4Channel 5 Channel 1

Channel 2Channel 3

T cycle = 42.4 ms

T channel

108

analog TBXs

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs

Introduction The TSX AMS 620 module provides a choice between voltage or current ranges.The module checks for under/overshoot corresponding to the selected range: it checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit.

Measurement zone

The measurement zone is in the nominal zone.Beyond the nominal zone, under/overshoot is tolerated up to the under/overshoot limits:Illustration:

Under/overshoot indications

If values provided by the application fall outside the limits, then saturation will occur at the value of the limit exceeded.The module continues to supply the converted value until saturation of the converter or of the display format (+32767/-32768), even though the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.The user can use the under/overshoot bit as a means of elminating these measurements.Under/overshoot bit:

Electrical range under/overshoot values

For voltage ranges, the module allows an overshoot of 5% on the positive electric part of the range.Under/overshoot values according to the type of input

nominal zone

undershoot zone overshoot zone

overshootlimit

undershootlimit

Bit name Meaning

%I\p.2.c\m.i.ERR When = 1, indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel.


+/-10 V -10.5 V +10.5 V.

0..5 V 0 V: this under/overshoot cannot be detected +5.25 V.

0..20 mA 0 V: this under/overshoot cannot be detected +21 mA.

4..20 mA +3.2 mA +20.8 mA.

109

analog TBXs

Filtering of measurements on inputs

Introduction The system uses first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog module channels, p. 189).




Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.On configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values.

Values for the TBX AMS 620 module



α

Efficiency Value to be selected

Corresponding time constant

No filtering 0 0 s 0

Low filtering 12

170 ms339 ms

0,7500,875

Medium filtering 34

678 ms1.35 s

0,9370,969

High filtering 56

2.71 s5.42 s

0,9840,992

α

110

analog TBXs

Displaying measurements on inputs

Introduction This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.



User-defined display of electrical ranges

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/ ), the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/ .The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.

Example:Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display: for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.Illustration:


unipolar range0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ ).

bipolar range+/-10V

from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/ to +10.000 °/

).

°°°

°°° °°°

°°°°°°

°°°°°°

Pressure

20.000 bars

2.000 bars

Current20 mA

111

analog TBXs

Characteristics of the outputs

Output writing The user has access via the program to 2 words (1 16-bit word per channel) in which the values of the analog outputs are given. from 0 to 10000 (that is 0 °/ to 10000 °/ ) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and

4/20 mA, from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/ to +10000 °/ ) for bipolar range +/-10 V.

Refreshing outputs via the module

Outputs are refreshed every 5 msThe response time between writing the output via the program and updating the outputs to the module limits depends on the PLC task period in which the module is configured.

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

112

analog TBXs

Fault handling

Dialog faults with the PLC

This type of handling groups together: setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.In the above cases, the user has two options for each output: maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal

display limits (0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.

Internal errors in the module

When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.

113

analog TBXs

Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs

At a Glance The TBX AMS 620 module includes an under/overshoot monitoring device.

Characteristics of the ranges

The limits and precisions of the various ranges are as follows:

Illustration

Under/overshoot identifiers

If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded. The overshoot is shown by:

Range Lower limit Upper limit Precision

+/- 10V -10000 +10000 conversion on 11 signed bits of -2048 to +2047 pulses

0.20mA 0 +10000 conversion on 11 bits of 0 to +2047 pulses

4.20mA 0 +10000 conversion on 11 bits of 0 to +2047 pulses

-10 V

+10 V

10000Numerical value

-10000

Analog outputvalue

20 mA


Analog outputvalue

20 mA


Analog outputvalue

04 mA

Bit name Meaning

%I\p.2.c\m.voie.ERR When equal to 1, shows a range overshoot on the channel.

114

analog TBXs

Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module

At a Glance Calibration (See Calibration function for an analog module, p. 214) is carried out globally for the module on channel 0.It is advised that you calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be done with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP mode. Calibration is a full scale calibration

Full scale calibration

Full scale calibration is done on the 0 channel by placing the standard reference source scaled to +/-0.01% directly on the input limits of the 0 channel of the base.

Precautions When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid, filtering and alignment are prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.As inputs other than the 0 channel will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before switching to calibration.

How to calibrate the module

The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the module:

Step Action

1 Access the calibration adjustment screen

2 Double click on the 0 channel.Result: A question appears ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.


4 Then perform the full scale calibration.According to the range to be calibrated, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0: reference voltage = 10 V (precision +/- 0.01%) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V ranges reference voltage = 5 V (precision +/- 0.01%) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V ranges

5 Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), use the Reference drop-down list box to select this value. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference are then calibrated automatically.

6 Calibrate the module for other ranges, if applicable.the command button Return to Factory Settings allows you to cancel all calibrations previously carried out and to return the module to the initial calibration settings configured in the factory.

7 Click on the Save command button in order to recognize and save the new calibration in the module. If you exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost

115

analog TBXs

Sensor alignment

At a Glance Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating parameter. An error linked to the process is compensated for. For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating parameter of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Example Let us suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value that must be entered is 3210.

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified from the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.For each input channel, the user can: view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel already possesses an alignment.The alignment offset can also be changed by program.Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.



116

analog TBXs

3.3 TBX ASS 200 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the TBX ASS 200 rack-based module.



Topic Page

Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module 118

Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module 120

Fault handling 121

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module 122

117

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module

General The TBX ASS 200 base unit is an analog output module containing 2 insulated channels. It must be associated with a TBX LEP 030 communicator. This module offers the following ranges for each of its outputs: Voltage: 10V, Current: 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA.

Overview The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions: refreshing the digital values corresponding to the analog output values

transmitted by the PLC, processing dialog errors with the PLC, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.Overview of the TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator:

Channel 1

Output 0

Output 1

24/48V

FIPIOChannel 1

Channel 0

DigitalAnalogConversion

Processes:- refreshing- error handling- range selection

Bus interface

Writing outputs

Supply

Channel 0

1234

118

analog TBXs

Description The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:

Address Function

1 refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor,

2 processing PLC dialog faults,

3 range selection for each output: voltage, current,

4 digital analog conversion.

Note: One channel can only be used in a single range, i.e. current or voltage.

119

analog TBXs

Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module

Writing outputs The user can access two words via the program (1 word of 16 bits per channel), where the analog output values are given. from 0 to 10000 (or 0 °/ à 10000 °/ ) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and 4/20

mA, from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/ to +10.000 °/ ) for bipolar range +/-10 V.

Refreshing the outputs via the module

The outputs are refreshed every 5 msThe response time between the output write via the program and updating the output at the module terminals depends on the period of the PLC task where the module is configured.

°°° °°°

°°° °°°

120

analog TBXs

Fault handling

Dialog faults with the PLC

This type of handling groups together: setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.In the above cases, the user has two options for each output: maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal

display limits (0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.

Internal errors in the module

When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.

121

analog TBXs

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module

Introduction The TBX ASS 200 module contains an under/overshoot monitoring device.

Range characteristics

The limits and specifications for the different ranges are as follows:

Illustration

Overshoot indications

If the values supplied by the application fall outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded. Overshoot is indicated by:

Range Lower limit Upper limit Precision

+/-10V -10000 +10000 conversion on 11 bits + sign from -2048 to +2047 points.

0.20mA 0 +10000 conversion on 11 bits from 0 to +2047 points.

4.20mA 0 +10000 conversion on 11 bits from 0 to +2047 points.

-10 V

+10 V


-10000

Analog outputvalue

20 mA


Analog outputvalue

20 mA


Analog outputvalue

04 mA

Bit name Meaning

%I\p.2.c\m.channel.ERR When = 1, Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel.

122

4
The remote analog Momentum modules
At a Glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter introduces the remote analog Momentum modules.



Section Topic Page

4.1 170 AAI 030 00 module 124

4.2 170 AAI 140 00 Module 128

4.3 170 AAI 520 40 Module 134

4.4 170 AAO 120 00 Module 141

4.5 170 AAO 921 00 Module 146

4.6 170 AMM 090 00 module 151

123

Analog Momentums

4.1 170 AAI 030 00 module

At a Glance

Aim of this Section?

This Section introduces the AAI 030 00 remote module.



Topic Page

Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module 125

Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module 126

124

Analog Momentums

Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module

General The 170 AAI 030 00 analog base features eight isolated inputs. It can be configured according to the following ranges: +/- 10 V, +/-5 V, 1…5 V, +/-20 mA, 4.20 mA.

Configuration of the base

The base uses: 8 adjacent input words, to send the input analog values of the base to the

processor module, 2 adjacent output words, to define the parameters of each of the 8 inputs.

Conversion time The conversion time depends on the number of declared inputs. A set time is to be systematically added.Time value:

Illustration

Note: The 8 analog inputs must be parametered before the base is brought into service.

Type Value

Conversion time of an input 1.33 ms

Set time 1.33 ms

Channel 1Channel 2

Channel 3Channel 4

Channel 5Channel 6

Channel 7Channel 8T fixed

1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms1,33ms

Maximum time for 8 declared inputs: 12 ms

125

Analog Momentums

Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module

Input values The analog values in input are read or written in one word per channel. Therefore, the 170 AAI 030 00 base uses 8 adjacent words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left-justified. The representation format is binary 2’s complement.The digital/analog conversion is carried out on 12 bits + polarity sign.The bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. As a result, the read value will be modified in increments of 8 units.Illustration:

Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 1

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.7

to

126

Analog Momentums

Parameters These words are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of words to configure the operating mode for the inputs. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.The order of the nibbles is as follows:

The value of each nibble is coded according to the following rules:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.5


Channel 5Channel 6Channel 7Channel 8

Nibble value (in binary) Value in Hex. Meaning

2#0000 0 reserved

2#0010 2 +/-5 VDC and +/-20 mA

2#0011 3 +/-10 VDC

2#0100 4 channel inactive

2#1001 9 1...5 VDC and 4...20 mA

Note: Any value apart from those indicated in the table above is prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

127

Analog Momentums

4.2 170 AAI 140 00 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the 170 AAI 140 00 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module 129

170 AAI 140 00 module words 130

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module 132

128

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module

General The analog base unit 170 AAI 140 00 has 16 common point inputs which are mutually non-insulated.It can be used for continuous process monitoring, measuring and regulation functions.This module also monitors wire breaking.It can be configured according to the following ranges: +/-10 V, +/-5 V, 4.20 mA.

Configuration of the base unit

The base unit uses: 16 contiguous input words, to send the analog values input at the base unit back

to the processor module, 4 contiguous output words, to define the parameters of each of the 16 inputs.

Conversion time The conversion time depends on the number of registered inputs. A fixed time is added systematically.Time values:

Illustration

Note: The 16 analog inputs must have parameters before the base unit is put into service.

Type Value

Conversion time for an input 1.5 ms

Fixed time 1.5 ms

Channel 1Channel 2

Channel 3Channel 4

Channel 5Channel 14

Channel 15Channel 16T fixed

1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms1ms

Maximum time for 16 declared inputs: 25 ms

129

Analog Momentums

170 AAI 140 00 module words

Input values The input analog values are read or written in one word per channel. The base unit 170 AAI 140 00 therefore use 16 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left justified.The representation format is binary, two’s complement.Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (bipolar ranges).Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.Illustration:

Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.15

to

130

Analog Momentums

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of words to configure the input operating mode. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.The nibbles are in the following order:

The value of each quartet is encoded according to the following rules:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.20

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.21



15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.22

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.23



Nibble value (binary) Value in Hexa Meaning

2#0000 0 reserved.

2#1010 A +/-5 VDC.

2#1011 B +/-10 VDC.

2#1100 C inactive channel.

2#1110 E 4..20 mA.

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are forbidden. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

131

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module

Range +/-10V The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage, is determined by the formula:Vn = 3200 x Va (in volts).Illustration:

Range +/-5V The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage, is determined by the formula:Vn = 6400 x Va (Va in volts).Illustration:

Vn

32000

Va

32767

10 V

10.2397 V

-32767 -32000

-10 V-10.2397 V

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

Vn

32000

Va

32767

5 V

5,1198 V

-32767 -32000

-5 V-5,1198 V


132

Analog Momentums

Range 4...20 mA In current range 3.6165 … 20.3835 mA, the value transmitted by the base unit, based on the input current (Ia) is determined by the formula:Vn = 2000 x Ia - 8000 (Ia in mA).Illustration:

Vn

32000

Ia

32767

+20,3835 mA

-32767

-767

+20 mA+4 mA

+1 mA-1 mA

Reminder: the resolution is on 12

133

Analog Momentums

4.3 170 AAI 520 40 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the 170 AAI 520 40 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module 135

170 AAI 520 40 module words 136

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module 140

134

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module

General The base unit 170 AAI 520 40 has four differential analog inputs. The inputs associated with the thermowells or thermocouples, support temperature monitoring, measurement and regulation functions. They can also be configured as voltage inputs in mV. The base unit recognizes wire breaks.This base unit has 4 analog inputs which can be configured with the following ranges: +/-100 mV, +/-25 mV, Temperature probe Pt100, Pt1000, Temperature probe Ni100 or Ni1000, Thermocouple B, E, J, K, N, R, S or T.


The base unit uses: 4 contiguous input words, to send the analog values at the inputs of the base unit

back to the processor module, 4 contiguous output words, to define the parameters of each of the 4 inputs.

Conversion time The conversion time is independent of the number of registered inputs.Conversion time = 500ms

Note: The 16 analog inputs must be assigned parameters before the base unit is put into service.

135

Analog Momentums

170 AAI 520 40 module words

Input values The input analog values are read or written in one word per channel. The base unit 170 AAI 520 40 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left justified.The representation format is binary, two’s complement.Analog digital conversion is performed on 15 bits + polarity sign.Illustration:

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of words, to configure the input operation mode. The parameter corresponds: to the type of sensor, to the selected unit of temperature, to the need for a wiring check.

Thermocouple ranges:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.3

to

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4to%MW\p.2.c\0.0.7 Channel parameters

Range Temperature Wiring check Parameter word (hexa)

Thermocouple B 1/10 degrees C inactive 2201

active 2301

1/10 degrees F inactive 2281

active 2381

136

Analog Momentums

Thermocouple E 1/10 degrees C inactive 1202

active 1302


active 1382

Thermocouple J 1/10 degrees C inactive 1203

active 1303


active 1383

Thermocouple K 1/10 degrees C inactive 1204

active 1304


active 1384

Thermocouple N 1/10 degrees C inactive 1205

active 1305


active 1385

Thermocouple R 1/10 degrees C inactive 2206

active 2306


active 2386

Thermocouple S 1/10 degrees C inactive 2207

active 2307


active 2387

Thermocouple T 1/10 degrees C inactive 2208

active 2308


active 2388

Range Temperature Wiring check Parameter word (hexa)

137

Analog Momentums

Ranges PT100, PT1000, Ni 100 and Ni 1000:

Range Cabling Temperature Wiring check Parameter word (hexa)

IEC PT100 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0A20

active 0B20

1/10 degrees F inactive 0AA0

active 0BA0

3 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0E20

active 0F20


active 0321

IEC PT1000 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0221

active 0321

1/10 degrees F inactive 02A1

active 03A1

3 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0621

active 0721


active 07A1

US/JIS PT100 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0A60

active 0B60

1/10 degrees F inactive 0AE0

active 0BE0


active 0F60

1/10 degrees F inactive 0EE0

active 0FE0

US/JIS PT1000 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0261

active 0361

1/10 degrees F inactive 02E1

active 03E1


active 0761

1/10 degrees F inactive 06E1

active 07E1

138

Analog Momentums

Voltage ranges

DIN Ni 100 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0A23

active 0B23

1/10 degrees F inactive 0AA3

active 0BA3


active 0F23

1/10 degrees F inactive 0EA3

active 0FA3

DIN Ni 1000 RTD 2 or 4 wires 1/10 degrees C inactive 0222

active 0322


active 03A2


active 0722


active 07A2

Range Wiring check Parameter word (hexa)

+/-25mV inactive 2210

active 2310

+/-100mV active 1211

inactive 1311

Range Cabling Temperature Wiring check Parameter word (hexa)

139

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module

Display for the range +/-100 mV

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage is determined by the formula:Vn = 320 x Va (Va in mV)Illustration:

Display for the range +/-25 mV

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage is determined by the formula:Vn = 1280 x Va (Va in mV)Illustration:

Ranges for thermal probes

If a Probe or Thermocouple input range is selected, the digital value transmitted is the temperature value directly expressed either in tenths of a degree Celsius or in tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, according to the unit of temperature selected in configuration.

Vn

32000

Va

32767

100 mV

102.326 mV

-32767 -32000

-100 mV-102.326 mV

Vn

32000

Va

32767

25 mV

-25.599 mV

-32767

-32000

-25 mV

25.599 mV

140

Analog Momentums

4.4 170 AAO 120 00 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the 170 AAO 120 00 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the 170 AAO 120 00 module 142

Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00 143

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module 145

141

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAO 120 00 module

General The base unit 170 AAO 120 00 has 4 analog outputs for controlling actuators in continuous movement, such as variable speed drives, proportional valves or electro-pneumatic converters.This module can be configured according to the following ranges: +/-10 V, 0 ... 20 mA.


The base unit uses: 4 contiguous input words, to write the output analog values of the processor

module to the base unit, 1 word, to define the parameters of each of the 4 outputs.

Cycle time The cycle time is independent of the number of registered outputs.Cycle time = 2 ms

Note: The 4 analog outputs must have parameters before the base unit is put into service.

142

Analog Momentums

Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00

Output values The output analog values are written in one word per channel. The base unit 170 AAO 120 00 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left justified.The representation format is binary, two’s complement.Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (in +/-10 V).Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.Illustration:

Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 1

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%QW\p.2.c\0.0.3

to

143

Analog Momentums

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of a word, to configure the input operation mode. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.The nibbles are in the following order:

The value of each nibble is encoded according to the following rules:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4


Nibble value (binary) Value in Hexa

Meaning

2#0000 0 reserved.

2#00x1 1 or 3 Output configured to zero by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to zero (0 V or 0 mA).

2#01x1 5 or 7 Output configured to full scale by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

2#10x1 9 or B Output configured to the last displayed value by default.

x has a value of either 0 or 1

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

144

Analog Momentums

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module

Range +/-10 V The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base unit is determined by the formula:Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.Illustration:

Range 0...20 mA The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula:1a = 1/1600 x Vn in mA.Illustration:

Va

32000 Vn

10 V

-32000

-10 V

Ia

32000 Vn

20 mA

0

145

Analog Momentums

4.5 170 AAO 921 00 Module

At a Glance


This section introduces the 170 AAO 921 00 remote module.



Topic Page

Introducing the 170 AAO 921 00 module 147

170 AAO 921 00 module words 148

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module 150

146

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAO 921 00 module

General The base unit 170 AAO 921 00 has 4 analog outputs for controlling actuators in continuous movement, such as variable speed drives, proportional valves or electro-pneumatic converters.This module can be configured according to the following ranges: +/-10 V, 4 ... 20 mA.


The base unit uses: 4 contiguous words to write the output analog values of the processor module to

the base unit, 1 word, to define the parameters of each of the 4 outputs.

Cycle time The cycle time is independent of the number of registered outputs.Cycle time = 2 ms

Note: The 4 analog outputs must be assigned parameters before the base unit is put into service.

147

Analog Momentums

170 AAO 921 00 module words

Output values The output analog values are written in one word per channel. The base unit 170 AAO 921 00 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left justified.The representation format is binary, two’s complement.Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (in +/-10 V).Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.Illustration:

Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%QW\p.2.c\0.0.3

to

148

Analog Momentums

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of a word, to configure the input operation mode. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.The nibbles are in the following order:

The value of each nibble is encoded according to the following rules:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4


Nibble value (binary) Value in Hexa

Meaning

2#0000 0 reserved.

2#00x1 1 or 3 Output configured to zero by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to zero (4 V or 0 mA).

2#01x1 5 or 7 Output configured to full scale by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

2#10x1 9 or B Output configured to the last displayed value by default.

x has a value of either 0 or 1

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

149

Analog Momentums

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module

Range +/-10 V The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base unit is determined by the formula:Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.Illustration:

Range 4...20 mA The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula:la = 1/20000 x Vn + 4 in mA.Illustration:

Va

32000 Vn

10 V

-32000

-10 V

Ia

32000 Vn

20 mA

4 mA

150

Analog Momentums

4.6 170 AMM 090 00 module

At a Glance

Aim of this Section

This Section introduces the 170 AMM 090 00 remote module.



Topic Page

Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module 152

170 AAM 090 00 module words 153

Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00 156

151

Analog Momentums

Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module

General The 170 AAM 090 00 analog base is a mixed module.It has analog channels and discrete channels: 4 differential inputs, 2 analog outputs, 4 24 VDC discrete inputs, 2 24 VDC/ 0.5 A discrete outputs.The discrete inputs are used to directly connect 2-wire proximity sensors. A thermal protection device protects every output from short-circuits and overloads. The outputs remain tripped until the fault disappears.The analog inputs of this base can be configured with the following ranges: +/- 10 V, +/-5 V, 1-5 V, +/- 20 mA, 4-20 mA.The analog outputs can be configured with the following ranges: +/- 10 V, 4-20 mA.

Configuration of the base

The base uses: 4 adjacent input words, to send the input analog values from the base to the

processor module, 2 adjacent output words, to define the parameters of each of the 16 inputs, 1 word to exchange with the discrete inputs, 1 word to exchange with the discrete outputs.

Conversion time The conversion times are fixed regardless of the number of analog inputs or outputs used.Time value:

Note: The 16 analog inputs must be parametered before the base is brought into service.

Type Value

Analog input conversion times 10 ms

Analog output conversion times 1 ms

152

Analog Momentums

170 AAM 090 00 module words

Discrete inputs The 170 AMM 090 00 base sends four discrete input bits (and an error detected message if necessary) to the master in a 16 bit word. The inputs are connected to base connector 2. Illustration:

Discrete outputs The master sends two discrete output bits to the base in a single 16 bit word. The outputs are connected to connector 3.Illustration:

Analog inputs The analog values in input are read or written in one word per channel. The 170 AAM 090 00 base uses 4 adjacent words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.The value is left-justified. The representation format is binary 2’s complement.The analog digital conversion is carried out on 12 bits + polarity sign (for bipolar ranges).Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. As a result, the read value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%IW\p.2.c\0.4

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

I4 I3 I2 I1Terminal block 1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%QW\p.2.c\0.2

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

O2 O1Terminal block 1

153

Analog Momentums

Illustration:

Output values The analog values in outputs are written in one word per channel. The base uses 2 adjacent words.The format is identical to the analog inputs.Illustration:

Parameters for analog inputs

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of words to configure the operating mode for the inputs. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.The order of the nibbles is as follows:


Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%IW\p.2.c\0.0.3

to

Always at 0

Always at 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


%QW\p.2.c\0.0.1

to

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4



2#0000 0 reserved

2#0010 2 +/-5 VDC or +/-20 mA

2#0011 3 +/-10 VDC

154

Analog Momentums

Parameters for analog outputs

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of a word to configure the operating mode for the outputs. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.The order of the nibbles is as follows:


2#0100 4 channel inactive

2#1010 A 1...5V or 4...20 mA


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

Reserved Reserved Channel 2 Channel 1

Nibble value (in binary)

Value in Hex.

Meaning

2#0000 0 reserved

2#00x1 1 or 3 Output configured by default to zero: sends a value to the base that makes it force the actuators to zero (0 V or 0 mA).

2#01x1 5 or 7 Output configured by default to full scale: sends a value to the base that makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

2#10x1 9 or B Output configured by default to the last displayed value

x equals 0 or 1 (doesn't matter)

Note: Any parameter value apart from those indicated in the tables above is prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

155

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00

Input range +/- 10V

The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:Vn = 3200 x Va in volts (for the linear zone)Illustration

Input range +/- 5V

The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:Vn = 6400 x Va in volts (for the linear zone).

Vn

32000

Va

(overshoot error) 32767

10 V10.238 V

-32767 (undershoot error)

-32000

-10 V-10.238 V


32760

-32760

<-10.238 V

> 10.238 V

: linear zone

156

Analog Momentums

Illustration

Input range +/- 20 mA

The current value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:Vn = 1600 x Ia in mA (for the linear zone).Illustration

Vn

32000

Va


5 V5.118 V

-32767 (undershoot error))

-32000

-5 V-5.118 V


32752

-32752

<-5.118 V

> 5.118 V

: linear zone

Vn

32000

Ia


20 mA

20,470 mA

-32767 (undershoot error)

-32000

-20 mA-20,470 mA


32752

-32752

<-20,470 mA

> 20,470 mA

: linear zone

157

Analog Momentums

Input range 1-5 V The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:Vn = 8000 x Va in volts (for the linear zone).Illustration:

Input range 4-20 mA

The current value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:Vn = 2000 x Ia in mA (for the linear zone).

Vn

32000

Va


5 V 5.094 V

0.904 V

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits

32752

-32738 (wire break)

>5.094 V

: linear zone

<0.5 V

1 v -766(undershoot error) -768

158

Analog Momentums

Illustration:

Output range +/- 10 V

The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base is determined by the formula:Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.Illustration:

Note: Inactive channels deliver a value of 0

Vn

32000

Ia


20 mA 20.376 mA

<3.617 mA

Reminder: the resolution is in 12 bits

32752

-32738 (wire break)

>20.376 mA

: linear zone

<2 mA

4 mA -766(undershoot error) -768

Va

32000 Vn

10 V

-32000

-10 V

159

Analog Momentums

Output range 0…20 mA

The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula:la = 1/1600 x Vn in mA.Illustration:

Note: When the bus is restarting, the outputs use the configured parameters. If the module has no valid parameter, the outputs are initialized at 0 V.

Note: When the bus is restarting, the outputs use the configured parameters. If the module has no valid parameter, the outputs are initialized at 0 V.

32000

20 mA

Ia

Vn

0

160

5
Module configuration
At a Glance

Aim of this Chapter?

This chapter shows how to configure an analog input/output module.



Section Topic Page

5.1 Configuring the analog application: General 162

5.2 Parameters for analog input channels 172

5.3 Parameters for analog output channels 178

5.4 Module configurations (illustrations) 182

161

Configuration

5.1 Configuring the analog application: General

At a Glance

Aim of this Section

This section describes the basic operations required to configure the analog application.



Topic Page

Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module 163

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module 165

How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module 167

How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the FIPIO bus

169

Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General 170

162

Configuration

Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module

At a Glance The configuration screen of the selected analog module in the rack displays the parameters that are associated to it.

Illustration This screen provides access to the display and modification of parameters in offline mode, as well as to Debugging in online mode.

12

3

4

2

3 Terminal block detection

TSX AEY 1600 [RACK 0 POSITION 2]

Designation: 16E ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Configuration

Channel TaskUsed SymbolMAST

3210

MAST

7654

Cycle

NormalFast

Range Scale Filter+/- 10 V 0

00000

%..%..%..%..%..%..

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

00

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

%..%..

MAST

111098

MAST

15141312

+/- 10 V 000000

%..%..%..%..%..%..

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

00

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

%..%..

163

Configuration

Description The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.


1 Title bar Gives the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the PLC.

2 Command zone Is used to display and select the type of parameters: operating mode (e.g.: Configuration), Debugging mode (diagnostics), only accessible when in online mode.

3 Module zone Gives a short name for the module and supplies supplementary information for certain modules, such as: the input scanning Cycle, the Cold Junction compensation made, the output Fallback mode.

4 Channel zone Shows the parameters configured for each of the analog module channels.

164

Configuration

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module

At a Glance The configuration screen of the selected analog module displays the parameters that are associated with it.

Illustration This screen provides access to the display and modification of parameters in offline mode, as well as to Debugging in online mode.

1

4

3

2

Label Value

Default parameters

Input 0Input 1Input 2

4..20mA4..20mA4..20mA


4..20mA4..20mA4..20mA


4..20mA4..20mA4..20mA

Input 9Input 10 Input 11

4..20mA4..20mA4..20mA

Input 12 Input 13 Input 14

Channel inactive4..20mA4..20mA

Input 15 4..20mA

Task:Channel 0

Designation: 16 IN ANA COMMON POINT

Adjustment

Base

MAST

170 AAI 140 00 [FIPIO2 MODULE 0]

165

Configuration

Description The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.


1 Title bar Gives the reference of the selected module and its physical position on the FIPIO bus.

2 Command zone Is used to display and select the type of parameters: Configuration enables modification of the Module zone, Adjustment enables modification of the Channel zone.Note:Adjustment is not allowed unless the PLC is in RUN mode.

3 Module zone Gives a short name for the module and provides complementary information: the channel scanning Cycle.

4 Channel zone Shows the value configured for each of the analog module channels.

Note: The assignment of a channel in the task is fixed in configuration mode and the type of channel is fixed in adjustment mode.

166

Configuration

How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module

Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration parameters of the channels of a module.

Some modules have a dialog box that enables the complementary parameters to be accessed.To access this dialogue box perform one of the following: right-click on the line of the table corresponding to the channel to be parametered

then select the Properties command in the drop-down menu, double left-click on the line of the table corresponding to the channel to be

parametered, select a cell of the channel to be parametered then confirm with Enter.

Step Action

1 Access the module hardware configuration screen.

2 Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module then perform the Facility → Open module command.Result: The configuration screen of the selected module appears.

Terminal block detection


Designation: 8I ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Configuration


3210

MAST

7654

Cycle

NormalFast


00000

%..%..%..%..%..%..

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

00

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

%..%..

167

Configuration

Example of complementary parametering screen:




Configuration


3210

MAST

7654

Cycle

NormalFast


00000

%..%..%..%..%..%..

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

00

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V

%..%..

Scale

-100% ->

100% ->

Display

Channel 7 parameters

-10000

10000

168

Configuration

How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the FIPIO bus

Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration parameters of the channels of a remote analog module on the bus:

Step Action


2 Double click on the FIPIO zone of the processor.

3 Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module then perform the Facility → Open module command.Result: The configuration screen of the selected module appears:

TBX AMS 620 [FIPIO 64 MODULE 0]

Designation: 6 IN HL 2 OUT ANA

Configuration

Channel Task Symbol Range Scale FilterMAST

3210 +/- 10 V 0

000

+/- 10 V+/- 10 V +/- 10 V

Channel Task Symbol Range Fallback Value

76 +/- 10 V 0

0+/- 10 V

54 +/- 10 V

+/- 10 V 00

%..%..%..%..%..%..

MAST

169

Configuration

Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General

Introduction The configuration editor offers a group of functions which are used to facilitate entry or modification of module parameters such as: the contextual menus, single or multiple selection of channels, copy/paste parameters (using contextual menus).

Access the contextual menus.

They can be accessed by right-clicking on the mouse, and are used for fast access to the main commands.

Select a channel or a cell

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a channel or the cell of a channel in a module:

Select a group of consecutive channels

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive channels in a module:

If the element to be selected is …

Then the available functions are …

the cell Copy parameters

Paste parameters

the module zone (outside table) Cancel modifications

Confirm

Animate

Step Action

1 Left click on the number of the required channel or cell.

Step Action

1 Select the first channel.

2 Press Shift and click on the last channel.

170

Configuration

Select a group of unconsecutive channels

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of unconsecutive channels in a module:

Select a group of consecutive cells

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive cells in a module:

Step Action

1 Select the first channel.

2 Press Ctrl and click successively on each of the channels.

Step Action

1 Select the first cell.

2 Drag the mouse downwards or upwards while keeping the mouse button depressed, then release it when the last cell has been reached.

171

Configuration

5.2 Parameters for analog input channels

At a Glance

Aim of this Section

This section shows the different input channel parameters by type of analog module.



Topic Page

Input parameters for racked analog modules 173

Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules 176

Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules 177

172

Configuration

Input parameters for racked analog modules

At a Glance Analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables)

Parameter TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420

Number of input channels

16 8 8 4

Channel used Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No

Scanning cycle

NormalFast

NormalFast

NormalFast

-

Range +/-10 V 0..10 V0..5 V1..5 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

+/-10 V 0..10 V0..5 V1..5 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

+/-10 V 0..10 V0..5 V1..5 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

+/-10 V 0..10 V0..5 V1..5 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

Filtering 0..6 0..6 0..6 -

Display

User User User User

Task associated to the channel

MAST / FAST MAST / FAST MAST / FAST MAST / FAST

Group of channels affected by the modification of the task

4 consecutive channels





Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No

Range undershoot monitoring

- - Yes / No Yes / No

%oo %oo %oo %oo

173

Configuration

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Range overshoot monitoring

- - Yes / No Yes / No

Range undershoot limit

- - min-12.5% min-12.5%

Range overshoot limit

- - max+12.5% max+12.5%

Threshold 0 - - - 0

Threshold 1 - - - 0

event processing

- - - Yes / No

Parameter TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614


4 16

Channel used - Yes / No

Scanning cycle - NormalFast

Range +/-10 V / 0..10 V /0..5 V / 1..5 V0..20 mA / 4..20 mAPt100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J / Thermo K / Thermo L / Thermo N / Thermo R /Thermo S / Thermo T / Thermo U-13..63 mV0..400 Ohms / 0..3850 Ohms

Thermo K / Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J / Thermo L / Thermo N / Thermo R / Thermo S / Thermo T / Thermo U-80..+80 mV

Filtering 0..6 0..6

High level Display

User User

Display thermowellsthermocouples

1/10 °C1/10 °F

1/10 °C1/10 °F


MAST / FAST MAST / FAST

Parameter TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420

%oo %oo

%oo %oo

174

Configuration

Group of channels affected by the modification of the task

1 channel 4 consecutive channels


Yes / No Yes / No

Wiring check Active / Inactive Active / Inactive

Cold junction compensation

Internal / External Telefast / Pt100read cold junction


- Yes / No


- Yes / No

Range undershoot limit

- min-12.5%

Range overshoot limit

- max+12.5%

High precision - Yes / No

Parameter TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614

175

Configuration

Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules

At a Glance Remote TBX analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Parameter TBX AES 400 TBX AMS 620


4 6

Range +/-10 V+/-5 V0..20 mA4..20 mAPt100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J /Thermo K / Thermo L / Thermo N / Thermo R / Thermo S / Thermo T+/-20 mV, +/-50 mV+/-200 mV, +/-500 mV

+/-10 V0..5 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

Filtering 0..6 0..6

High level Display

User User

Displaythermowellsthermocouples

1/10°C1/10 °F

-


MASTFAST

MASTFAST

Sensor check Active / Inactive -

Rejection 50Hz / 60Hz -

%oo %oo

%oo

176

Configuration

Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

At a Glance Remote Momentum analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.


Note: Most of these parameters can only be accessed in the Adjustment (See Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module, p. 165) mode of Momentum modules

Parameter 170 AAI 030 00 170 AAI 1400 00 170 AAI 520 400 170 AMM 090 00


8 16 4 4

Range +/-10 V

+/-5 V or +/-20 mA

1..5 V or4..20 mA

Channel inactive

+/-10 V+/-5 V 4..20 mAChannel inactive

+/-25 mV+/-100 mVEIC Pt100EIC Pt1000US/JIS Pt100US/JIS Pt1000Ni100 / Ni1000Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J / Thermo K / Thermo L / Thermo N / Thermo R /Thermo S / Thermo T

+/-10 V

5 V or4..20mA

1..5 V or4..20 mA

Channel inactive

Displaythermowellsthermocouples

- - 1/10 °C1/10 °F

-

Task associated to all the channels

MASTFAST

MASTFAST

MASTFAST

MASTFAST

Wiring test - - Active / Inactive -

Cabling - - 2 or 4 wiresOnly 3 wires for the thermowells

-

177

Configuration

5.3 Parameters for analog output channels

At a Glance

Aim of this Section

This section shows the different output channel parameters by type of analog module.



Topic Page

Output parameters for racked analog modules 179

Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules 180

Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules 181

178

Configuration

Output parameters for racked analog modules

At a Glance Racked analog output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.


Module TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800

Number of output channels

4 8

Range +/-10 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

+/-10 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

High level Display (non modifiable) (non modifiable)



Terminal block detection Yes / No Yes / No

Fallback Fallback to 0MaintainFallback to a value

Fallback to 0MaintainFallback to a value

24V supply check / Yes / No

Supply / Internal / External


Yes / No Yes / No


Yes / No Yes / No

%oo %oo

179

Configuration

Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules

At a Glance Remote analog output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.


Module TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200


2 2

Range +/-10 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

+/-10 V0..20 mA4..20 mA

Display

Task associated with the channel


Fallback Fallback to 0MaintainFallback to a value

Fallback to 0MaintainFallback to a value

%oo %oo

180

Configuration

Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

At a Glance Remote analog Momentum output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.


Note: Most of these parameters can only be accessed in the Adjustment (See Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module, p. 165) mode of Momentum modules

Module 170 AAO 120 00 170 AAO 921 00 170 AMM 090 00


4 4 2

Range +/-10 V0..20mA

+/-10 V4..20mA

+/-10 V0..20mA

Task associated with all the channels

MAST / FAST MAST / FAST MAST / FAST

Fallback MaintainFallback to 0Full scale fallback

MaintainFallback to 0Full scale fallback

MaintainFallback to 0Full scale fallback

181

Configuration

5.4 Module configurations (illustrations)

At a Glance

Aim of this section

This section introduces most of the procedures for modifying configuration parameters at analog input/output module level.



Topic Page

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module 183

Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel 184

Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current 185

Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel 187

Modifying the filter value of analog module channels 189

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module 190

Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules 191

Modifying Input channels used 192

Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection 193

Cold junction compensation 194

High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module 195

Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs 196

Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules 197

182

Configuration

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module

At a Glance This parameter defines the range of the input or output channel. According to the type of module, the input or output range can be: in electrical voltage, in electrical current, thermocouple, thermowell.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the range assigned to the channels of an analog module.

Step Procedure

1 Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

2 To access the required input channel, click on the browse button in the drop-down menu which is in the Range column of the input channels zone. Result: a drop-down list appears.

3 Select the required range.

4 Confirm the reconfiguration if necessary.

Range

4..20mA0..20mA+/-10V+/-10V

183

Configuration

Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel

At a Glance This parameter defines the task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated. The task is defined: for all the channels of an FIPIO connection point, for a group of 2 or 4 consecutive channels.Possible options are: the task MAST, the task FAST.Note: It is vital that no more than 2 analog modules, each having 4 channels used, are assigned to the FAST task. If more than 2 are assigned, there is a risk of system problems.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of an analog module.

Note: The FAST task is only assigned to input channels in a fast scanning cycle.

Step Action


2 To access the group of input channels, click on browse button of the drop-down menu situated in the Task column of the input channels zone. Result: a drop-down list appears:

3 Select the required task.

4 Confirm the reconfiguration if necessary.

MAST

FASTMAST

Task

184

Configuration

Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current

At a Glance This parameter defines the display format of a measurement for an analog module channel whose range is configured as voltage or as current.The display format can be: standardized 0..10000 or +10000 (%), user (User),

185

Configuration

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the display scale assigned to an analog module channel.

Step Action


2 For the required channel, double click on the corresponding box in the Scale column of the input channels zone.

3 Result: The Channel parameters dialog box appears:

4 Type in the values to be assigned to the channel in the two Display boxes situated in the Scale zone.

5 Confirm the selection by closing the dialog box

6 If the default values have been selected (standardized display), the corresponding cell in the Scale zone shows %.. Otherwise, it shows User (user-defined display)


-10000

10000

-11250

11250

0

0

0

-100%->100%->

Under:

Over:

Threshold 0:

Threshold 1:

Checked.

Checked

Event Event

Under/overshoots

ScaleDisplay

186

Configuration

Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel

At a Glance This parameter defines the display format of the measurement of an analog module channel whose range is configured in thermocouples or thermowells.The display format can be for display in degrees Celsius or in degrees Fahrenheit, with signaling of short circuit or open circuit if necessary.The display format can be: standardized, which is the default scale of the selected thermocouple of

thermowell, defined in tenths of a degree (for example: -600 to +1100 of C for

a Ni1000 probe) (1/10 F or 1/10 C), user-defined (User).

°° °

187

Configuration

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the display scale assigned to an analog module channel.

Step Action


2 For the required channel, double click on the corresponding box in the Scale column of the input channels zone.

3 Result: The Channel parameters dialog box appears:

4 Select or deselect the Broken wire test.

5 Select the unit of temperature by checking C or F.

6 Check the Standardized box for a standardized display, or modify at least one of the limits: the display zone of the channel parameters shows %.. whichever unit of temperature has been selected.


-2700

Broken wire test

Scale

Under/overshootsChecked

Checked

Normalized

Under:

Over:

Display

Temperature range:from -2700 to 13720 1/10°C

Unit

1/10°C1/10°C13720

-2700

13720

°C°F

° °

188

Configuration

Modifying the filter value of analog module channels

At a Glance This parameter defines the type of filtering of the selected input channel for analog modules.The available filter values are: 0: no filtering, 1 and 2: low filtering, 3 and 4: medium filtering, 5 and 6: high filtering.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the filter value assigned to the inputs of analog modules.

Note: If the fast scanning cycle is selected, filtering is not recognized.

Step Action


2 For the required input channel, click on the arrow of the drop-down menu in the Filter column.

3 Result: The drop-down menu appears:

4 Select the filter value to be assigned to the selected channel.

5 The efficiency value (alpha coefficient) of the selected filter and the associated response time are then displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

Filter0012345

189

Configuration

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module

At a Glance This parameter defines the scanning cycle of the inputs of racked analog modules. The input scanning cycle can be: normal: the channels are sampled according to the time specified in the module

characteristics, fast: only the registered and Used inputs are sampled. The cycle time depends

on the number of channels used and on the scanning time of a channel.Input registers are updated: for the Normal cycle, at the start of the MAST task cycle, for the Fast cycle, at the start of the cycle of the task to which the module is

assigned (MAST or FAST).

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the scanning cycle assigned to the inputs of an analog module.

Note: The Normal / Fast cycle and channels Used parameters cannot be modified in online mode, if the application has been transferred to the PLC with the default values of these parameters (normal cycle and all channels used).

Step Action


2 For the groups of input channels, click on the checkbox Normal / Fast situated in the Cycle field of the module zone.Result: the selected scanning cycle will then be assigned to the channels.



Designation: 8E ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Configuration


3210

Filter

MAST

7654

Cycle

NormalFast

Range Scale

7

+/-10V+/-10V+/-10Vnot used

+/-10Vnot usednot used

not used

%...%...%...%...

%...%...%...

%...

0000

000

0

190

Configuration

Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules

At a Glance This function detects the presence of the SubD connector(s) or of the terminal block and signals a fault when the latter is absent.

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for selecting terminal block detection.

Note: for modules equipped with two SubD connectors, the terminal block fault is signaled if at least one channel is used on the absent connector.


NormalFast

Cycle


Step Action


2 Click on the Terminal block detection checkbox.

191

Configuration

Modifying Input channels used

At a Glance A channel is declared in a task when the measured values are ‘returned’ to the task assigned to the channel. When a channel is unused the line is grayed out, the value 0 is returned to the application program and the faults on this channel (range overshoot, etc.) are inactive.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for modifying the use of a channel:

Step Action


2 Select the required channel.

3 Click on the Used checkbox of the channel to be parameterized to select or deselect the channel:

Ch. Used0123

192

Configuration

Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection

At a Glance Overshoot monitoring is defined by a monitored or unmonitored lower limit and by a monitored or unmonitored upper limit.Event processing is defined by the event number that is activated on crossing one of the thresholds indicated.

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for adjusting these parameters:

Note: Event processing is only possible if the PL7 application includes an event

Step Action


2 Double click on the channel to be modified.Result: The Channel parameters dialog box appears.

3 Check or uncheck the box Monitored undershoot to indicate an undershoot limit.

4 Check or uncheck the box Monitored overshoot to indicate an undershoot limit.

5 Check or uncheck the box Event to characterize an event trigger. The event processing selected in this screen is activated on crossing one of the thresholds indicated in Threshold 0 and Threshold 1.


-10000

10000

-11250

11250

0

0

0

-100%->100%->

Under:

Over:

Threshold 0:

Threshold 1:

Checked.

Checked

Event Event

Under/overshoots

ScaleDisplay

193

Configuration

Cold junction compensation

At a Glance This function is available on input modules TSX and TBX. It can be internal or external. By default, internal compensation is offered.

For the TSX AEY 414 module

The table below gives the procedure for modifying cold junction compensation.

For the TSX AEY 1614 module

The table below gives the procedure for modifying cold junction compensation.

Note: If external compensation is selected, channel 0 of the module is forced, after confirmation, in range Pt100

Step Action


2 Click on the Internal or External checkbox in the Cold Junction box.

Step Action


2 Click on the Internal Telefast or External Pt100 button.These two command buttons are used to select the type of cold junction compensation: Internal Telefast (default). Compensation is made at the level of the Telefast

terminal block; in this case it is possible to ‘return’ the cold junction temperature value via channel 8, by checking the box Read Cold Junction after confirming the warning message,

External, via a PT100 probe to be connected to channels 0 and 8. Channel 0 supplies current to the probe and channel 8 measures the temperature.

194

Configuration

High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module

At a Glance This mode offers greater precision on temperature measurements using a self-calibration procedure.

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for selecting the high precision mode.

Note: this self-calibration procedure adds a period of 70 ms to each cycle (See Timing of measurements, p. 46).

Step Action


2 Click on the High Precision checkbox.

195

Configuration

Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs

At a Glance This parameter defines the fallback mode that is assumed by the outputs when the PLC switches to STOP mode or when there is a communication fault.Possible modes are: Fallback: the outputs are set to a value between -10000 et 10000 (0 by default)

which can be parameterized, Maintain the value: the outputs remain in the state in which they were before the

switch into STOP mode.

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for defining the fallback mode assigned to the outputs of analog modules.

Step Action

1 To modify the fallback value, leave the Fallback box checked and type the required value in the Value box.Result: The selected fallback mode will then be assigned to the module outputs.

2 For maintenance, click in the Fallback check box. Result: The maintenance of the value will then be assigned to the module outputs.

Fallback Value7061964

Fallback Value

196

Configuration

Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules

At a Glance TBX or TSX analog output modules have parameters which apply to the whole module.These parameters define the type of supply for the module, the module supply monitoring, the terminal block detection.This information is all displayed in the module zone

Supply to outputs

This is carried out using 2 buttons: internal: the 24V supply internal to the module feeds the outputs channels, external: a 24V supply external to the module feeds the outputs channels

Supply fault When the 24V output supply fault monitoring box is checked, the module monitors the presence of the internal or external 24V supply.


When the Terminal block detection box is checked, the module monitors the presence of the terminal block, and indicates a fault if this is missing.

Designation: 8O ANA. HL NON INS.

InternalSupply

External

24V output supply monitoring


Note: Do not supply more than two TSX ASY 800 modules with the power supply from the same rack.

197

Configuration

198

6
The Debugging function
At a Glance

Subject of this chapter

This chapter looks at the debugging function and commands in analog input/output modules.


This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module 200

Description of an analog module debugging screen 201

Analog module diagnostics 203

Forcing/unforcing analog channels 204

Detailed analog channel diagnostics 206

Modifying the channel filtering value 208

Input Channel Alignment 210

Modifying the fallback value of an output 212

Calibration function for an analog module 214

199

Debugging

Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module

Introduction This function is only accessible in online mode. Debugging is used for each input/output module of the application: to display the parameters of each of its channels (channel state, filtering value,

etc.), to access the diagnostics and adjusting function for the selected channel (forcing

the channel, masking the channel, etc.).The function also gives access to the module diagnostics in the case of a fault.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Debugging function:

Step Action

1 Switch to on-line mode.

2 Double-click on the module in hardware configuration.Result: The module Debugging screen then appears.

200

Debugging

Description of an analog module debugging screen

At a Glance The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel in the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access the channel command (forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

Illustration The debugging screen is composed as follows:

1

2

3

5

Global unforcing

Debugging

FSymbol0-4-2-3

ERR DIAG...RUN IO

DIAG..DIAG..DIAG..DIAG..

Channel ERR < Value > A0123

0000

Designation: 4E ANA. RAPIDES HN. Version: 1.0


Adjusting Channel 2

0

Display

Forcing

Event

Alignment Target value Offset

0

0

0 0

0EventThreshold 0:

Threshold 1:

ResetConfirm

Confirm

Unforce

Force

Range +/-10V-100000 to 10000

4

201

Debugging

Description The table below presents the different elements of the debugging screen and their functions.


1 Title bar Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical location as well as the rack number for the rack-mounted modules or the FIPIO connection point for the remote input/outputs.

2 Drop-down menu

Enables selection: of the debug phase:

Configuration, Debugging (diagnostics), only possible when in online mode, Calibration (for input modules).

of channels by type (input or output), when the specified module contains both inputs and outputs.

3 Module zone Displays the name of the selected module as well as a copy of the module status LEDs (Run, Err, I/O).Provides direct access: to module diagnostics when the module has an error (indicated by the LED integrated

in the diagnostics access button switching to red), to the Global unforcing function for channels.Note: Displaying this zone is optional. The selection is made using the View → Module zone command.

4 Channel zones

Displays the value and status for each channel in the module in real-time. The symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when the user has defined this (from the variables editor).Provides direct access: to channel-by-channel diagnostics when channels have an error (indicated by the LED

integrated in the diagnostics access button switching to red), to the output reactivation command.

5 Command zone

Gives access to the commands of a channel.

202

Debugging

Analog module diagnostics

At a Glance The Module diagnostics function displays errors when they occur, classified according to category: internal errors (module breakdown, running self-test), external errors (terminal block fault), other errors (configuration error, module missing or switched off, faulty channel(s)

(details in channel diagnostics)).A module error is indicated by a number of LEDs changing to red, such as: in the rack-level configuration editor:

the module position LED, in the module-level configuration editor:

the Err and I/O LEDs, depending on the type of error, the Diag LED.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Module diagnostics screen.

Step Action

1 Open the module debugging screen.

2 Click on the Diag button in the module zone.Result: The list of module errors appears.

Note: It is not possible to access the module diagnostics screen if a configuration error, major breakdown error or module missing error occurs. The following message appears on the screen: " The module is missing or different from that configured for this position."

Module diagnostics

Internal faults External faults Other faults

Terminal block

OK

203

Debugging

Forcing/unforcing analog channels

At a Glance This function is used to modify the state of all or some of the channels of a module.The state of a forced output is fixed and cannot be modified by the application until after unforcing.

The various commands available are: for one or several channels:

forcing to the indicated value, unforcing (when the selected channel(s) are forced,

for all the channels of a module (when at least one channel is forced: global channel unforcing.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or some of the channels of a module:

Note: However, in the case of a fault involving an output fallback, the state of the outputs takes the value defined on configuration of the Fallback mode parameter.

Step Action for a channel


2 Double-click in the cell in the Value column of the required channel (1).

3 Enter the required value in the Forcing box.

4 Click on the Force button.Result: an F appears in the column F

Display

Forcing

Event

0

0

Event

Confirm

Unforce

Force

Range +/-10V-100000 to 10000

Adjusting Channel 2

0

204

Debugging

It is possible to disable forcing of all the channels of a module with the command button Global unforcing in the Debugging screen.

Rules to be respected

It is only possible to force an output when the task associated with this output is in RUN mode. If the task is in STOP mode, forcing is accepted but not applied; the output is in Fallback/Maintain mode.If an output is in forced state, it switches to Fallback/Maintain mode when the associated task switches to STOP mode. When this task returns to RUN mode, the output takes the forced value again.A forced channel cannot be reconfigured in online mode.

(1) The Channel adjustment screen can also be accessed by right-clicking on the required channel then left-clicking on the Properties button.


Global Unforcing

Debugging

ERR DIAG...RUN IO

Designation : 4 FAST HN. ANALOG INPUT Version : 1.0


205

Debugging

Detailed analog channel diagnostics

At a Glance The Channel diagnostics function displays errors when they occur, classified according to category: internal faults:

Module failure external faults:

sensor link fault terminal block fault range overshoot or undershoot fault calibration fault cold junction compensation fault

other faults: terminal block fault configuration fault communication error application error 24V power supply fault value outside limits channel not ready

A faulty channel is indicated by the Diag LED in the Err column in the configuration editor switching to red.

206

Debugging

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Channel diagnostics screen.

Step Action


2 For the faulty channel, click on the Diag button in the Err column.

Result: The list of channel errors appears.

Note: The channel diagnostics information can also be accessed by program (refer to the Shared task functions manual: READ_STS instruction).

FSymbole0-4-2-3


Ch. ERR < Value > A0123

0000

Channel diagnostics

Internal faults External faults Other faults

Terminal block

OK

Forced channel

207

Debugging

Modifying the channel filtering value

At a Glance This function is used to modify the filtering value of one or several channels of an analog module.The available commands are: 0: no filtering, 1 and 2: low filtering, 3 and 4: medium filtering, 5 and 6: high filtering.

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for changing a filtering value.


1 Access the debug screen.

2 Select the channel to be modified in the channel zone and double-click in the corresponding box in the Filter box.

3 Click on the little arrow in the box in the Filtering field of the Channel adjustment dialog box, and define the new selected filtering value in the drop-down menu.Result: The Channel adjustment dialog box appears.

4 Confirm the choice by closing the Channel adjustment dialog box.

Global unforcing

Debugging

FSymbol-252-193-188-177

ERR DIAG...RUN IO


Channel ERR Value Filter A0123

0000

Designation: 16E ANA. HIGH LEVEL Version: 0.4


Adjusting Channel 7

0

Display

Forcing

Filtering

Alignment Target Offset

1

0 0

ResetConfirm

Confirm

Unforce

Force

Range +/-10V-100000 to 10000

456

0000

-166-177-177-177


456 7

0000

0000

-257-198-182-177


891011

0000

0000

-171-171-166-182


12131415

0000

0000

208

Debugging

5 The new filtering value then appears in the box corresponding to the selected channel in the Filter column of the channel zone.


209

Debugging

Input Channel Alignment

At a Glance The alignment procedure for an input allows an offset value to be added to the value measured by this input in order to compensate for a sensor shift (for example, adjusting the current value to 0° C of a Pt100 probe plunged into a bucket of ice for adjustment purposes).

Procedure The following table describes the procedure used to align an input channel:

Note: This procedure cannot be used when the application is in a FLASH TSX MFP ••• memory card.

Step Action for one channel

1 Access the "Debug" screen.

2 Select the channel to be aligned in the channel field and double-click on the corresponding check box in the A column.

3 Click on the check box in the Target Value field in the Alignment dialog box and enter the new alignment value.

4 Confirm this new alignment value by clicking the Validate button.Result: The new offset value is applied and appears in the A column.

5 Close the Channel Adjust dialog box.

Adjust Channel 3

0

Scaling

Forcing

Filtering

Alignment

Validate

1964

Reset

0

Validate

Unforce

Force

Target value Offset

Range +/- 10V-10000 to 10000

0

210

Debugging

Notes

Note: When the offset alignment is modified by program using the WRITE_PARAM instruction (see the Shared Applications manual), its value must fall between +1500 and -1500.

Note: The calculated offset value only acknowledges "keyboard" user commands. Simultaneous execution of the program (RUN) also adjusting the alignment will make the offset erroneous.

211

Debugging

Modifying the fallback value of an output

At a Glance When an output is configured in Fallback mode, the corresponding button is valid but the Fallback/Maintain information is grayed out, because the fallback mode cannot be modified in Debugging mode. However, it is possible to change the fallback value by entering a new value.

Procedure The table below summarizes the procedure for modifying the fallback value:


1 Access the debug screen.

2 Select the channel in the channel zone and double-click in the corresponding box in the Fallback column.

3 Click on the box in the Value field in the Fallback dialog box and enter the new fallback value.The value must be: For TSX ASY 800 and ASY 410 software version modules < 1.0,

between -10000 and 10000 in range 10 V, between 0 and 10000 in ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA,

For TSX ASY 800 and ASY 410 software version modules > 1.0, between -10500 and 10500 in range 10 V, between 0 and 10500 in ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.

4 Confirm this new value by clicking on the OK button.Result: The new fallback value is applied and appears.

5 Close the Channel adjustment dialog box.

Global unforcing

Debugging

FSymbol0000

ERR

DIAG

RUN IO

DIAG.DIAG.DIAG.DIAG.

Channel ERR Value Fallback0123

0000

Designation: 16I ANA. HIGH LEVEL Version: 0.4


0

Channel 0

Forcing

Unforce

Force

Range +/-10V-100000 to 10000

DIAG ...

Confirm0Value:

FallbackFallback Maintain

Display

212

Debugging

Notes

Note: The fallback value can also be modified by program, with the WRITE_PARAM instruction (see Shared task functions manual).

Note: The fallback value cannot be modified on TBX modules.

213

Debugging

Calibration function for an analog module

Introduction This function is only accessible in online mode. It is used to recalibrate the channels of each analog input module of an application.Calibration is used to correct the long-term module drift. It can also be used to optimize the precision of the measurement at ambient temperatures other than 25 degrees C.

Procedure Procedure for accessing the Calibration function:

Step Action

1 Double-click on the module in hardware configuration.Result: The Debugging screen appears.

2 In the drop-down menu at the top left, select the Calibration function to make the Calibration screen appear.


RUN ERR IO DIAG...

Calibration

HIGH LEVELConfigurationDebuggingCalibration

214

Debugging

Introduction to the calibration screen

This screen displays the state of each of its channels in real-time and enables their calibration to be accessed.Screen view:

Different functions of the calibration screen

Address Function

1 This panel gives the module catalogue reference and slot in the PLC (rack and position).

2 This command zone displays the function in progress (Calibration function) and is used to select the Configuration or Debugging function from a drop-down list box. By activating the Calibration checkbox, the calibration of the channels (TSX AEY 800 / 810 / 1600, TBX AES 400, TBX AMS 620) or of the selected channel (TSX AEY 414) can be accessed.

3 This zone at "module" level contains the module name and version.

4 This zone at "channel" level displays the ERR information for each channel: all the measurements are invalid; filtering and alignment are inhibited.

1

2

3

4

Calibration

FSymbol-258-198-188694

ERRRUN IO


Channel ERR Value0123


-177-177-182-182


4567

-263-204-188-182


891011

-177-177-172-188


12131415

DIAG ...

215

Debugging

Use For TSX AEY 800 / 810 / 1600, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620 modules, only channel 0 needs to be calibrated for all the module channels to be calibrated.For the TSX AEY 1614 module, only channels 0 and 8 need to be calibrated for all the module channels to be calibrated.For the TSX AEY 414 module, general channel calibration must be performed.

List The different calibration procedures are described in each section referring to input modules: TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 (See Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX

AEY 1600 modules, p. 31) TSX AEY 810 (See Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module, p. 42) TSX AEY 1614 (See Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module, p. 53) TSX AEY 414 (See Calibration, p. 67) TBX AES 400 (See Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module, p. 101) TBX AMS 620 (See Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module, p. 115)

216

7
Associated bits and words
At a Glance


This chapter looks at the addressing of objects associated to analog inputs/outputs.


This chapter contains the following sections:

Section Topic Page

7.1 Addressing of analog module objects 218

7.2 Implicit exchange objects 225

7.3 Explicit exchange objects 228

217

Bits and words

7.1 Addressing of analog module objects

At a Glance

Subject of this section

This section introduces the principle of addressing for analog module objects.


This section contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Addressing objects of analog rack module 219

Addressing objects of remote analog modules 222

218

Bits and words

Addressing objects of analog rack module

At a Glance The addressing of the main bit and word objects of input/output modules is done on a geographical basis. It depends on: the number (address) of the rack, the physical position of the module in the rack, the module channel number.

Illustration Addressing is defined in the following way:

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F X Y i rSymbol Object type Format Rack Position Channel no. Position

219

Bits and words

Syntax The table below describes the different addressing parameters.

Family Element Values Description

Symbol % - -

Object type IQ

--

Image of the physical input of the module.Image of the physical output of the module.This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

M - Internal variable.This reading or writing information is exchanged at the request of the application.

K - Internal constant.This configuration information is available as read only.

Format (size) X - Boolean.For Boolean objects this element can be omitted.

W 16 bits Single length.

D 32 bits Double length.

F 32 bits Floating. The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard (equivalent to IEC 559).

Rack address x 0 or 10 to 7

TSX 5710/102/103/153, PMX 57102, PCX 571012.Other processors.

Module position y 00 to 14 (1)

Position number in the rack. When the rack number (x) is different from 0, the position (y) is encoded with 2 digits: 00 to 14; on the other hand, if the rack number (x) is 0, you remove the insignificant zeros (elimination from the left) from "y" ("x" does not appear and "y" is 1 digit for values less than 9).

Channel no. i 0 to 127 or MOD

MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and parameters common to all the channels.

Rank r 0 to 127 or ERR

Position of the bit in the word.ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

(1) : the maximum number of slots means that 2 racks must be used for the same address.

220

Bits and words

Examples The table below shows some examples of addressing analog objects.

Object Description Illustration

%IW102.5 word picture of analog input 5 of the module placed in position 2 in rack address 1.

%QW204.3 %QW204.3 designates the word picture of analog input 3 of the module placed in position 4 in rack 2.

%I102.MOD.ERR Information on analogue input module fault in position 2 of rack 1.

%I204.3.ERR Information on a fault on channel 3 of the analogue output module in position 4 of rack 2.

221

Bits and words

Addressing objects of remote analog modules

At a Glance The addressing of the main bit and word objects of remote modules on the FIPIO bus is on a geographical basis. It depends on: the connection point, the type of module (standard or extended), the channel number.

Illustration Addressing is defined in the following way:

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F p.2.c m i rSymbol Object type Format Address

module/channel andconnection point

Moduleno.

Channel no.Posi-tion

\\

222

Bits and words

Syntax The table below describes the different elements that make up addressing.

Family Element Values Meaning

Symbol % - -

Object type IQ

--

Image of the physical input of the module,Image of the physical output of the module,This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

M - Internal variable,This reading or writing information is exchanged at the request of the application.

K - Internal constant,This configuration information is available as read only.

Format (size) X - Boolean,For Boolean objects the X can be omitted.

W 16 bits Single length.

D 32 bits Double length.

F 32 bits Floating. The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard (equivalent to IEC 559).

Module/channel address and connection point

p 0 or 1 Position number of the processor in the rack.

2 - Channel number of the built-in FIPIO link in the processor.

c 1 to 127 Connection point number.

Module position m 0 or 1 0 : standard module, 1: extension module.

Channel no. i 0 to 127 or MOD

MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and parameters common to all the channels.

Rank r 0 to 255 or ERR

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

223

Bits and words

Examples The table below shows some examples of addressing objects of remote analog modules.

Object Meaning

%IW\0.2.6\0.5 word image of analog input 5 of the standard remote input module at connection point 6 of the FIPIO bus.

%QW\0.2.8\1.7 word image of analog output 7 of the extended remote output module at connection point 8 of the FIPIO bus.

0

1

2

3

4

TSX 57352 FIPIO manager

0

0

0

0 1 TBX ASS 200TBX AES 400TBX LEP 030

170 FNT 110 01 170 ADI 350 00

TBX ASM 620TBX LEP 030

TBX LEP 030 TBX AES 400

224

Bits and words

7.2 Implicit exchange objects

Implicit Exchange Objects Associated with the Analog Application

At a Glance These are objects used for programming and diagnostics of analog modules. These objects are exchanged automatically on each cycle of the task in which the module channels are configured.

Channel Values Analog channel values, which are applicable to all modules.

Example: The %IW105.3 word permanently contains the value present on input 3 of the module located in position 5 of the rack with address 1.

Error Bit Objects Error bits, which are applicable to all analog modules.

Address Function

%[email protected] Value of input channel of the analog input module.

%[email protected] Value of output channel of the analog output module.

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]

When set to 1, indicates that the input channel i of the module at address @module is faulty.

%[email protected] When set to 1, indicates that the module located at address @module is faulty.

Legend: @module = module address: xy for in-rack modules, \p2c\m for remote modules.

225

Bits and words

Current Value Status Word

Meaning of the bits of the current value status word %IWxy.i.1

Event source status word

Meaning of the bits of the event source status word %IWxy.i.2 (1=no event, 1=event)

Address Modules concerned

%IWxy.i.1 TSX AEY420/810/1614

Address Meaning

%IWxy.i.1:X0 Aligned channel

%IWxy.i.1:X1 Forced channel

%IWxy.i.1:X2 Recalibration mode

%IWxy.i.1:X3 Recalibration command in progress

%IWxy.i.1:X4 Recalibrated channel

%IWxy.i.1:X5 Measurement in lower tolerance zone

%IWxy.i.1:X6 Measurement in upper tolerance zone

%IWxy.i.1:X7 Loss of event (only on TSX AEY420)Latching converter fault (only on TSX AEY1614 with hardware version ≥1.6.)

%IWxy.i.1:X8 to 15 Reserved

Address Module concerned

%IWxy.i.2 TSX AEY420

Address Meaning

%IWxy.i.2:X0 Crossing threshold 0 when rising

%IWxy.i.2:X1 Crossing threshold 0 when falling

%IWxy.i.2:X2 Crossing threshold 1 when rising

%IWxy.i.2:X3 Crossing threshold 1 when falling

%IWxy.i.2:X4 to15 Reserved

226

Bits and words

Enable event command word

Meaning of the bits of the enable event command word %QWxy.i.1 (0=mask, 1=enable)

Address Module concerned

%QWxy.i.1 TSX AEY420

Address Meaning

%QWxy.i.1:X0 Crossing threshold 0 when rising

%QWxy.i.1:X1 Crossing threshold 0 when falling

%QWxy.i.1:X2 Crossing threshold 1 when rising

%QWxy.i.1:X3 Crossing threshold 1 when falling

%QWxy.i.1:X4 to15 Reserved

227

Bits and words

7.3 Explicit exchange objects

At a Glance

Subject of this section

This section introduces explicit exchange objects for analog modules.


This section contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Explicit exchange objects: General 229

Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs 230

Details of Analog Application Explicit Exchange Words 233

228

Bits and words

Explicit exchange objects: General

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects give information (e.g.: terminal block fault, module missing, etc.) and additional commands for performing advanced programming of the task functions.

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged on request from the program user using the following instructions: READ_STS (read status words), WRITE_CMD (write command words), WRITE_PARAM (write adjustment parameters), READ_PARAM (read adjustment parameters), SAVE_PARAM (save adjustment parameters), RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).

Note: Configuration constants %[email protected] (@module = module address), not explained in this manual can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

Note: All these instructions are detailed in the manual: Shared Task Functions

229

Bits and words

Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs

Racked output modules

Table of words available according to the different racked modules:

Address Meaning TSX AEY 800

TSX AEY 810

TSX AEY 1600

TSX AEY 420

TSX AEY 414

TSX AEY 1614

%MWxy.MOD.2 Module status word

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MWxy.i Exchange in progress


%MWxy.i.1 Exchange report Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.2 Channel status word


%MWxy.i.3 Command (recalibration/forcing)

No Yes No Yes No Yes

%MWxy.i.4 Command (forcing value)

No Yes No Yes No Yes

%MWxy.i.5 Command (range to be recalibrated)

No Yes No No No Yes

%MWxy.i.6 Command (current source to be recalibrated)

No No No No Yes No

%MWxy.i.7 Command word containing the channel filtering co-efficient

Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.8 Command word containing the channel alignment offset


%MWxy.i.9 Command word containing the value of threshold 0 assigned to the channel

No No No Yes No No

230

Bits and words

Remote modules Table of words available according to the different remote modules:

The command words above can be modified by program:Example: Filtering co-efficient for channel 3 of module TSX AEY 1600 modified by giving it the value 2.The module is in position 3 of rack 0.The sequence is as follows:

%MWxy.i.10 Command word containing the value of threshold 1 assigned to the channel

No No No Yes No No

Address Meaning TSX AEY 800

TSX AEY 810

TSX AEY 1600

TSX AEY 420

TSX AEY 414

TSX AEY 1614

Address Meaning TBX ASS 200

TBX AES 400

TBX AMS 620

170 AAI 14000

170 AAI 52040

170 AAO 12000

170 AAO 92100

%MW\p.2.c\m.MOD.2 Module state Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MW\p.2.c\m.i Exchange in progress

No No Yes (*) Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.1 Exchange report Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.2 Channel state Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.3 Command (recalibration/forcing)

Yes Yes Yes No No No No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.4 Command (forcing value)

Yes Yes Yes No No No No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.5 Command (range to be recalibrated)

No No Yes (*) No No No No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.6 Command (current source to be recalibrated)

No No Yes (*) No No No No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.7 Adjust (filtering coefficient)

No Yes Yes No No No No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.8 Adjust (alignment offset)

No Yes Yes No No No No

(*) These words only exist for channel 0 and channel 4 of the modules TBX AMS 620. Information contained in these words concerns the 2 or 4 successive module channels.

231

Bits and words

! %MW9.3.7:=2; ! WRITE_CMD %CH9.3;For more information on programming explicit objects, refer to the manual: Common Tasks.

Racked output modules

Table of words available according to the different racked modules:

Address Meaning TSX ASY 410

TSX ASY 810

%MWxy.MOD Reserved Yes Yes

%MWxy.MOD.1 Reserved Yes Yes

%MWxy.MOD.2 Module state Yes Yes

%MWxy.MOD.3 Reserved Yes Yes

%MWxy.i Exchange in progress Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.1 Exchange report Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.2 Channel state Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.3 Reserved Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.4 Command word containing the channel forcing value

Yes Yes

%MWxy.i.5 Command word containing the channel fallback value

Yes Yes

232

Bits and words

Details of Analog Application Explicit Exchange Words

Module Status Word

The %[email protected] word contains the module status word. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits of this word have the following meaning:

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]:X0 Module failure

%[email protected]:X1 Faulty channel(s)

%[email protected]:X2 Terminal block fault

%[email protected]:X3 Self-testing in progress

%[email protected]:X4 Reserved

%[email protected]:X5 Configuration fault

%[email protected]:X6 Module missing or switched off


%[email protected]:X8 Possible FIPIO extension module failure

%[email protected]:X9 Channel fault(s) on possible FIPIO extension module

%[email protected]:X10 Terminal block fault on possible FIPIO extension module

%[email protected]:X11 Self-testing in progress on possible FIPIO extension module


%[email protected]:X13 Configuration fault on possible FIPIO extension module

%[email protected]:X14 Possible FIPIO extension module missing or switched off


(1)@module = module address. xy for in-rack modules, \p.2.c\m for remote modules.

233

Bits and words

Input Channel Status Word

The %[email protected] word contains the status word for a module channel. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits of this word have the following meaning:

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]:X0 Sensor link fault

%[email protected]:X1 Range overshoot fault

%[email protected]:X2 Terminal block fault


%[email protected]:X4 Module failure

%[email protected]:X5 Configuration fault

%[email protected]:X6 Communication fault

%[email protected]:X7 Values outside limits

%[email protected]:X8 Channel not ready

%[email protected]:X9 Action rejected / Cold junction compensation fault (modules AEY 414 and AEY 1614)Converter reset in progress (only channels 0 and 8 and module AEY 1614 with hardware version ≥1.6.)

%[email protected]:X10 Calibration fault

%[email protected]:X11 Recalibration in progress, for modules TSX AEY 1600/800/414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620

Reserved for the other modules

%[email protected]:X12 Recalibration mode, for modules TSX AEY 1600/800/414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620


%[email protected]:X13 Forced channel, for modules TSX AEY 1600/800/414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620


%[email protected]:X14 Recalibrated channel, for modules TSX AEY 1600/800/414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620

Range undershoot for modules TSX AEY 810/420/1614 Reserved for the other modules

%[email protected]:X15 Aligned channel for modules TSX AEY 1600/800/414 Range overshoot for modules TSX AEY 810/420/1614 Reserved for the other modules


234

Bits and words

Output Channel Status Word

The %[email protected] word contains the status word of a channel. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits of this word have the following meaning:

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]:X0

24 V power supply fault for the TSX ASY 800 module Reserved for the other modules


Range overshoot fault


Terminal block fault


Range overshoot fault if the %[email protected]:X1 bit is at 1 for the TSX ASY 800 module and the TSX ASY 410 module (Software version >=2.0)



Module failure


Configuration fault


Communication fault


Values outside limits


Channel not ready


Action rejected / Cold junction compensation fault (modules AEY 414 and AEY 1614)


Reserved


Reserved


Reserved


Forced channel


Reserved


Reserved

235

Bits and words


Address (1) Meaning

236

II
The regulation functions
Introduction

Aim of this part This part introduces the regulation functions on the Premium PLCs and describes its implementation with the PL7 Junior and Pro software.




8 General on the PID 239

9 Description of the regulation functions 243

10 Operator dialogue on CCX 17 265

11 Characteristics of the functions 277

12 Example of application 281

13 Appendices 291

237

Regulation functions

238

8
General on the PID
Introduction

Aim of this chapter

This chapter introduces the standard regulation functions of the PL7 software.


This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

General introduction 240

Principal of the regulation loop 241

Development methodology of a regulation application 242

239

General on the PID

General introduction

General The regulation functions are the standard elements of the PL7 language.They support programming of the regulation loops of the Micro and Premium PLC’s.

These functions are particularly adapted to: answering the needs of the sequential process which need the auxiliary

adjustment functions (examples: Plastic film packaging machine, finishing treatment machine, presses…),

respond to the needs of the simple adjustment process’ (examples: metal furnaces, ceramic furnaces, small refrigerating groups…),

respond to the automatic control features or to the mechanical regulation which has a critical sampling time (examples: torque regulation, speed regulation).

A pre-configured interface with the CCX_17 range supports the driving and the adjustment of the regulation loops. In this area, up to 9 regulation loops are accessible via the CCX_17.

Available functions

The standard regulation functions are split into two categories: a family of algorithm functions:

PID function to execute a mixed PID correction (serial – parallel), PWM function to execute the modulation adjustment period on the discrete

outputs, SERVO function to execute the motor command adaptations,

an operator dialogue function (PID_MMI) which integrates a driving and adjustment application for the PID application on CCX_17 version 2.

The PID_MMI function is linked to 3 types of pre-configured screens.

Note: There is not a limit to the number of PID functions that are available in a function. In practice, it is the maximum number of input and output modules which are accepted by the PLC that limits the number of loops.

240

General on the PID

Principal of the regulation loop

Introduction The working of a regulation loop has three distinct phases: the acquisition of data and of:

measurements from the process’ sensors (analog, encoders), setpoint(s) generally from PLC internal variables or from data from the

CCX_17. execution of the PID regulation algorithm, the sending of orders adapted to the characteristics of the actuators to be driven

via the discrete or analog outputs.

The PID algorithm generates the command signal from: the measurement sampled by the input nodule, the setpoint value fixed by either the operator or the program, the values of the different corrector parameters.

The signal from the corrector is either directly handled by an analog output card of the PLC linked to the actuator, or handled via the PWM or SERVO adjustments in function with the kinds of actuator to be driven on a PLC discrete output card.

Illustration The following diagram schematizes the principal of a regulation loop.

Corrector

INP

UT

S

OU

TP

UT

S

PLC

Adapter

SE

NS

OR

S

Process to order

AC

TU

AT

OR

S

Operator dialogue desk CCX 17

ME

AS

UR

EM

EN

TS

OR

DE

R

241

General on the PID

Development methodology of a regulation application

Diagram of the principal

The following diagram describes the linking of tasks to be carried out during the creation and debugging of a regulation application.

Note: The defined order is given for information only.

Application / Configuration Configuration of interfaces Discrete, Analog, Counts

Application / Data Input data constant, mnemonic, numerical values

Programming: Ladder, List MAST, FAST, SR Regulation functions, Operator dialogue

PLC /Connector Transfer of the application in the PLC

Animation tables Variable table

Debugging program and adjustment

Debugging by the CCX 17

File / Save Storing of the application

Operating the regulation

loops

Operating the process via the CCX 17

Documentation Application folder

242

9
Description of the regulation functions
Introduction


This chapter describes the regulation functions.


This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Programming a regulation function 244

PID Function 245

Programming the PID function 247

PWM Function 252

Programming the PWM function 254

SERVO Function 256

Programming the SERVO function 260

Performance of the functions in the operating mode 263

243


Programming a regulation function

Programming rules

The regulation function parameters must all be informed. The functions use 3 kinds of parameters: read only parameters, considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, write only parameters, positioned at the conclusion of the function’s execution, the read and write only parameters, whose contents are considered at the

beginning of the function’s execution, are then updated by the results of the function.

Parametering The word type input parameters are the analog sizes expressed in the scale [0, +10000] and can be directly connected to measurement sensors via the words %IWxy.i des analog inputs.

The bit type output parameters support ordering discrete actuators and can be directly connected to the %Qxy.i. type variables.

In the same way, the word type output parameters support ordering of analog actuators on the scale [0, +10000] and can be directly appointed to the %QWxy.i. type variables.

The MWi:L word table type parameters regroup the user parameters and the data necessary to the internal working of the function.If the length of a table is sufficient, the function is not executed.

Note: The regulation functions must be programmed in a periodic task (MAST periodic or FAST). They must not be conditioned.

Note: In order to keep the adjustment parameters of the OF adjustment on cold start, it is necessary to delete the %MWi reset to zero option (in the processor’s configuration screen).

244


PID Function

General The PID function completes a PID correction via an analog measurement and setpoint on the [0-10000] format and provides an analog command to the same format.

Available functions

The PID OF is composed of the following functions: serial / parallel PID algorithm, forward / backward action (according to the KP gain sign), action derived from measurement or from distance, high and low limitation of the setpoint to [0-10000], high and low limitation of the output in automatic mode, anti-saturation of the integral action, Manual/Automatic operating modes without definitely changing, PID access control through the dialog operator, operating in integrator for (KP = TD =0).

Note: The display parameters used by the CCX 17 are shown in physical units, For a correct PID operation, you must stay within the scale of [0-1000] for the

measurement and the setpoint.

245


Operating principles

The following diagram presents the operating principle of the PID function.

Note:The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming the PID function, p. 247) module.

The Setpoint branch

The Measurement branch

INTERNAL SETPOINT

PROCESS VALUEP.V

CORRECTOR P.I.D.

The PID action

SET POINTS.P

ε

TI

TD d dt

KP

++

+

Integrated

Derived

Derivative action

TS

PV_DEV

+

-SETPOINT USED

Limiter10000

0

Action derived on themeasurement

MEASUREMENT USED

INTERNAL MEASUREM

The PID operation modes

Followed without repeated command attempts on Auto – Manu >switching

Limiter

OUT_MAX

OUT_MIN

OUT_MAN

OUTP

AUTO

DIALOGUE OPERATOR CCX 17

- PV_MMI - PV_SUP- SP_MMI - PV_INF

1

0

1

0

Deviation

246


Programming the PID function

At a Glance PID functions are standard PL7 functions. They are therefore available from the function library.This means that it is possible, by working with the language editors, to use assisted entry for a PID function in order to facilitate programming.

Illustration The illustration below shows the Functions screen in the library which can be used to implement the PID function.

Syntax The call syntax for the PID function is:

PID(TAG,UNIT,PV,OUT,AUTO,PARA)

Note: A PID function can be entered in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function must not be subject to any conditions.

Parameters

Display the call

Function Information:

Call format

EF

FUNCTION parameters:

Family V.Bib V.App Comment

TAG

---

-

-

Name

UNIT STRINGSTRING IN

IN Unit of measurement (6 char.), used by the HMI>>Label of PID (8 char.), used by the HMI on CCX17

Name Type Nature Comment Entry field

)PID ( “TEMP”,”DEGRES”,%MW10,%MW11,TRIG_PROD_A,%MW20:43

PV WORD Process variable, format [0; +10000]OUT WORD Output, format [0; +10000]

INOUT

Pulse Width Modulation of a numerical valueManagement of dedicated HMI on CCX17 for PIDsMixed PID controller

PID output stage for discrete valve controlPWMPID_MMIPID

SERVOGRAFCETTimer functionsOrphee function

Integer tables

Single precision realsProcess control

1.002.002.10

2.10

2.222.01 2.01

“DEGRES”“TEMP”

%MW10%MW11

247


Parameters of the PID function

The table below shows the different parameters of the PID function.

The table below shows the different parameters of the PARA table:

Parameter Type NatureIN = InputOUT = Output

Default value

Description

TAG 8 characters (maximum)or%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 8

IN - Name used for the PID used by the CCX 17.

UNIT 6 characters (maximum)or %MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 6

IN - Unit of measure for the PID used by the CCX 17.

PV %MWi or %IWxy.i.j IN - Input representing the process variable for the function.

OUT %MWi or %QWxy.i.j OUT 0 Analog output of the PID.If TI = 0, an offset of 5000 is added to the OUT output in Auto mode.

AUTO %Mi , %Ixy.i or %Qxy.i IN / OUT 0 Operating mode of the PID and the CCX 17.0: manual, 1 = Auto.

PARA %MWi:43 IN / OUT - (See table below for details of PARA table).

Parameter Position Function

SP %MWi Internal setpoint in 0/10000 format

OUT_MAN %MW(i+1) Value of the manual output of the PID (between 0 and 10000)

KP %MW(i+2) Proportional gain of the PID (x100), with sign and without units (-10000<KP<+10000). The sign of Kp determines the direction in which the PID acts (negative: direct, positive: reverse)

TI %MW(i+3) Integral time of the PID (between 0 and 20000)

expressed in 10-1 seconds

TD %MW(i+4) Derivative time of the PID (between 0 and 10000)

expressed in 10-1 seconds

TS %MW(i+5) Sampling period of the PID (between 1 and

32000) expressed in 10-2 seconds The actual sampling period will be a multiple of the task period in which the PID closest to TS is located

248


OUT_MAX %MW(i+6) Upper limit of the PID output in auto mode. (between 0 and 10000)

OUT_MIN %MW(i+7) Lower limit of the PID output in auto mode. (between 0 and 10000)

PV_DEV %MW(i+8):X0 Derivative action chosen 0 = on process variable, 1 = on deviation

NO_BUMP %MW(i+8):X4 Bump or bumpless mode.0 = bumps, 1 = no bumps

DEVAL_MMI %MW(i+8):X8 = 1 : inhibits acknowledgment of the PID by the Human Machine Interface. = 0 : the PID is used by the Human Machine Interface.This bit makes it possible to avoid having to carry out scale conversions on PIDs not being used by the CCX_17, and to select the PIDs being used, particularly when there are more than 9 PIDs in the PL7 application.

PV_SUP (CCX 17) %MW(i+9) Upper limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -9 999 999 and + 9 999 999).

PV_INF (CCX 17) %MD(i+11) Lower limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -999 999 and + 9 999 999).

PV_MMI (CCX17) %MD(i+13) Image of the process variable in physical units (x100)

SP_MMI (CCX 17) %MD(i+15) Operator setpoint and image of the setpoint, in physical units (x100)

Note: The other parameters used for internal management of the PID must never be

modified by the application or by transferring data when in RUN. The values used by the CCX 17 are multiplied by 100 so that they can be shown

with 2 figures after the decimal point on the CCX 17 (the CCX 17 does not use floating point format but supports a fixed decimal point format).


249


Rules There is no alignment of the internal setpoint to the process variable in manual mode.

Scaling is only performed when one of the setpoints is modified (SP or DOP_SP).

The algorithm without integral action (TI = 0) performs the following operation:

The algorithm with integral action (TI <0) performs the following operation:

On cold start, the PID resumes in manual, with the output at 0. To impose automatic mode or a manual input not at zero after a cold start, you must program the initialization sequence after the PID call.

For The output is ... Where ...

OUT = KP [ t+ Dt] / 100 + 5000 Dt= derivative action

For The output is ... Where ...

OUT = KP [ t+(TS/10.TI). t+ Dt]/100 OUT

= OUT + OUT

Dt= derivative action

Note:

εt SP PV–= ε

εt SP PV–= ∆ ∆ε ε ∆

∆

TD x Dt(t-1) - 10(PV - PV(t-1))

TD + TSDt =

250


Examples The examples provided below are in Ladder language.

Where the process control Human Machine Interface is used (DEVAL_MMI = 0)

Where no Human Machine Interface is used DEVAL_MMI = 1.

Note: In this example, the TAG and UNIT parameters are not applicable, so you can simply enter the values.

(* PID correction on process control loop without built-in HMI

PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%MW10,%MW1>>

with PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%IW3.1,%QW4.0,%M10,%MW20:43)

OPERATE

(* Correction PID sur la boucle de régulation sans DOP intégré

PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%MW10,%MW1>>

avec PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%IW3.1,%QW4.0,%M10,%MW20:43)

OPERATE

251


PWM Function

General The PWM function supports regulation of a pulse width on a TOR output. It is a function that formats the PID’s output.

The pulse width depends on the PID’s output (The PWM function’s INP input) and the modulation period.

Operating principles

The circuit diagram of the function’s operation is as follows:

Note:The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming the PWM function, p. 254) module.

PV

SP

PID OUTP INPPWM

T_MOD

PW_O

252


Pulse widths To each TOP of the T_MOD modulation period, the activation period in 10-3 second of the PW_O output is calculated according to the following formula:

State 1 of the gap (shown in 10-2 seconds) = INP * T_MOD / 1000 The following timing diagram illustrates this formula:

Practical rules T_MOD = TS (where TS is the sampling period of the upstream PID),

The period of the current task (expressed in 10-3 second) is equal to:(Required resolution)* 10 * T_MOD.

The PID is in the MAST task, the MAST’s period is 50*10-3 s, TS = 500*10-2 s and the required resolution is 1/50 (a T_MOD period must contain at least 50 periods of the current task). T_MOD = TS = 500.

The period of the task where the PWM is introduced must therefore be less than 500

* 10 /50 =100 10-3 s. The PWM function can therefore be programmed in the MAST task. the resolution will be 1/100.

Modulation period

PW_O

50%

Widthof pulse

Time

75% 35%

253


Programming the PWM function

Introduction The PWM function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PWM function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PWM function.

Syntax The PWM function’s call syntax is:

PWM(INP,PW_0,PARA)

Note: The PWM function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Parameters

Call display

Information Functions:

Call format

EF

Parameters of the FUNCTION:

Family Lib.V App.V. Comment

INP

---

-

-

Name

PW_O EBOOLWORD IN

OUT Discrete output cyclic report equal to the LESS than valueNumerical size to modulate

Name Type Kind Comment Entry field

)PWM ( %MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5

AR_W PWM parameters (5 word table)PARA IN/OUT

Pulse width modulation of a numerical sizeManagement of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from Mixed PID regulator

PID output stage for open/close valve orderPWMPID_MMIPID

SERVOGRAFCETStalling functionsOrphee Function

Integer tables

Single precision realsProcess Control

1.002.002.10

2.10

2.222.01 2.01

%Q6.3%MW11

%MW90:5

254


Parameters of the PWM function

The table below presents the different parameters of the PWM function.

Examples The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

Parameter Type KindIN = InputOUT = Output

Description

INP %MWi IN Analog value to be modulated in the pulse width (format [0 – 10000])

PW_0 %Qxy.i ou %Mi OUT Logic output (TOR) whose aspect ratio is the image of the INP input

PARA %MWi:5 IN / OUT Modulation period shown in 1/100ths of seconds (between 0 and 32767). T_MOD must be more than or equal to the current task’s period and it is adjusted by the system to be a whole multiple of this.Table of 5 words whose first word corresponds to the T_MOD parameter. The following are used internally by the function and must never be modified by the application

PWM(%MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5)

%MW90:=%MW105

PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW>>

(* PID furnace regulation *)

(* Alignment of the T_MOD (PWM) on the TS of the PID *)OPERATE

(* Discrete output command in period modulation *)

with PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW11,%M10,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

OPERATE

255


SERVO Function

General The SERVO function supports regulation with a motor type actuator steered by 2 alternating actions (UP and DOWN).

When there is a copy of a position, the valve’s position is locked via the INP (setpoint) and POT (position measurement) inputs.

When the copy does not physically exist, the algorithm no longer uses the PID’s absolute output but the output’s variation. The UP output (or DOWN, according to the variation sign) is put at 1 for a length of time proportional to the actuator opening time and to the variation of the value. Also the notion of minimum pulse time is introduced.

Principle of operating with a position copy

The SERVO function locks the motor’s position according to a setpoint of the INP position from a PID’s output on the [0-10000] format, and to a POT position measurement. The locking algorithm is a relay with hysteresis.In this case, the PID, T_MOTOR and T_MINI parameters are not used.

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming the SERVO function, p. 260) module.

Note: It must be connected in tandem with the analog output of a PID. It cannot be used alone.

PV

SP

PIDOUTP INP

UP

POT

DOWN

+

-

HYST

SERVO

256


Principle of operating without a position copy (POT= -10000)

In this case the SERVO function synchronizes itself with the upstream PID via the bias of the PID parameters table, passed in parameter to the SERVO function.

The algorithm receives in input the PID’s variation output and converts it into pulse period, according to the following formula:

T_IMP (shown in 10-3 s) = OUT x T_MOTOR / 1000

The acquired period adds itself to the remaining period of the preceding cycles: in fact, what is not "consumed" in a cycle is memorized for the following cycles. This ensures a smooth operation especially with sudden variations of the (ex: PID setpoint level) command and in manual mode. Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming the SERVO function, p. 260) module.

257


Example The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

Caption:1. The PID variation output is of +20% (T_MOTOR pulse =25 s for a 100% variation), in this case the pulse affects the UP output for a period of 5 s,

2. The PID variation is of +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. This pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.), and it does not affect the outputs,

3. A second variation of +2% appears and the function holds this variation concurrently with the preceding one (which corresponded to a variation less than the minimal value) for its calculation, which corresponds to a positive global variation of +4%, and therefore to a pulse of 1 s on the UP output,

4. A variation of –24% appears and the activated pulse is therefore of 6 s on the DOWN output,

5. Before the following second, another variation of +22% brings the system back to a global variation of 2% < to the variation of T_MINI (4%). The function finishes carrying out the minimal pulse of 1 s.

Note 1: The SERVO function does not manage the position limits, these must be managed by the application. If a limit is detected, you must force the output corresponding to 0 (UP for the high limit, DOWN for the low limit).

OUT

UP

DOWN

+20%

+2% +2%

+24% +22%

1 s5 s

1 sT_MOTOR = 25 s

1 2 3 4 5

T_MINI = 1 s

258


Example: (done in Ladder language)

Note 2: Passing to the operating mode with copy to the mode without copy is possible (for example: when the copy has an error, go to mode without copy).

SERVO(Outp,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%M>>)

(* Management of limits *)

OPERATE

Limit_up

Limit_down

%Q2.1

R

R

%Q2.2

259


Programming the SERVO function

Introduction The SERVO function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a SERVO function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the SERVO function.

Syntax The SERVO function’s call syntax is:

SERVO(INP,POT,UP,DOWN,PID,PARA)

Note: The SERVO function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Parameters

Call display


Call format

EF

Parameters of the PROCEDURE:


---

-

-

Name

WORDIN

IN Position copy, format [0;10000] [-10000>>Position setpoint, format [0;10000] (to conn>>


)

EBOOL Alternating output, UP operating directionEBOOL Alternating output, DOWN operating direction

OUTOUT

Integer tablesProcess ControlSingle precision reals

Integer tables

Bit tablesInteger tables

2.002.012.22

2.00

2.002.10 -

WORD

-Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical sizeManagement of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PIDMixed PID regulator


SERVO

INPPOTUPDOWN

OUTP-10000%Q2.1%MW100:43

SERVO ( OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%MW100:43,%MW180:10

260


Parameters of the SERVO function

The table below presents the different parameters of the SERVO function.

The table below presents the different parameters of the PARA table:


Description

INP %MWi IN Position setpoint ([0 – 10000] format) that has to be connected to the PID output.

POT %MWi or direct IN Position copy, ([0 - 10000] format) 0 : closed valve; 10000: open valve. If the copy does not exist. POT must be initialized at –10000. This particular value indicates "no copy".

UP %Qxy.i or %Mi OUT Output signal for the motor’s UP operating direction.

DOWN bit type %Q or %M

OUT Output signal for the motor’s DOWN operating direction.

PID %MWi:43 IN / OUT The PARA parameter table of the upstream PID. Used if there are no copy words for the synchronization with the upstream PID. See Parameters of the PID function, p. 248.

PARA %MWi:10 IN / OUT (See the table below for the breakdown of the PARA table).


T_MOTOR %MWi Valve opening time shown in 10-2 s.Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

T_MINI %MW(i+1) Minimal pulse time shown in 10-2 s.Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

HYST %MW(i+2) Value of the hysteresis on the [0 – 10000] format.Used if the copy does not exist (POT: [0 - 10000]).

Note: The other parameters that are used by the function’s internal management must

never be modified by the application. All the parameters are obligatory, regardless of the operating mode.

261


Examples The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

Case with a position copy.

Case without a position copy.

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>>

with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>>

with SERVO(OUTP,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

OPERATE

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>>

with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>>

with SERVO(OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

OPERATE

262


Performance of the functions in the operating mode

Introduction This paragraph describes the performance of the functions in different starting cases: cold start (new application, change of cartridge…), warm restart (power return without changing the application context), first execution after adding a function via modification in connected mode.

Cold start This type of start occurs for a new application or a change of cartridge.On a cold start, the PLC can start automatically in RUN (according to the application’s configuration). The function correctors have a security performance: manual mode, outputs at 0. In addition, this supports the switching of the PLC into RUN mode without carrying out the PID adjustment, then its debugging with the CCX 17 (the adjustment can only be done in RUN).

Warm restart This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.With a power return after an outage (regardless of how long it lasted) and if the application context is not lost or modified, the functions go back to their state before the outage. If the user wants to use another performance, it is his responsibility to test the %S1 system bit and to associate the required processing to it (forcing in manual mode…).

Adding a new call in connected mode

Following the addition of a new function regulation call in connected mode, an identical initialization to the case of the cold start is carried out.

Note: The PLC’s time-and-date stamp allows you find out the duration of the last outage.

Note: In order to be seen as a new function, this must use a new parameter table. Therefore, the removal of a PID, followed by adding a PID that uses the same parameter table is not considered as an addition of a new PID. In this case the PID is executed in the same state and with the same parameters as the preceding PID.

263


264

10
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Introduction

Aim of this Chapter

This chapter presents the operator dialogue on CCX 17.



Topic Page

Dialog operator on the CCX 17 266

Selecting a loop 268

Controlling a loop 269

Adjusting a loop 270

PID_MMI Function: programming 271

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

275

265


Dialog operator on the CCX 17

Introduction The CCX 17 permits viewing and control of all the modifiable parameters of a PID corrector without having to program a specific aplication.

The dialog operator function integrates a control and adjustment application on the CCX 17 application’s PIDs. It provides management of 3 types of screens on the CCX 17 supporting selection of a PID, viewing and controlling of this PID and adjusting the parameters of the PID. It inserts itself easily into any dialog operator application on the CCX 17.

Limitations There is no limit to the number of PIDs in the application. On the other hand, a maximum of 9 PIDs are accessible via the dialog operator function on the CCX 17-30 and on the CCX 17-30.

Navigating from one screen to another is done via the CCX’s command buttons and within screens via the up and down arrow buttons. The navigation offered is a "vertical" navigation. You must always return to the loop selection screen to gain access to the values of other correctors.

The display is done over 4 lines (8 lines with the CCX 17-30) with the messages in 40 characters.

What the keys do

Note: This function is only effective if the PLC is in RUN.

Position of the keys Functions

The MOD key supports switching from display mode to input mode (in this case, the selected value starts flashing).

On the same screen, the input mode remains active for all the fields and pressing MOD again allows you to exit the input mode (stopping the flashing).

In input mode, the modification of a parameter is acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key.

Fixed messages

MOD ENTER

266


Set up principle Setting up the dialog operator is easy: the PID_MMI function(s) are started at each cycle (non-conditioned call), a single call to the PID_MMI function manages all the application’s PIDs.

However, a call from the PID_MMI function via CCX_17, which is connected to the PLC is necessary,

detection of the application’s PIDs via the PID_MMI function is automatic, including when adding or removing in RUN. Therefore there is no declaration to do,

Identification of the required corrector is done via the "TAG" parameter from the PID function and its selection depends on the value of the function’s "DEVAL_MMI" parameter. (Only acknowledged via the PID_MMI function, the PIDs whose DEVAL_MMI parameter is = 0).

267


Selecting a loop

Introduction The number of PIDs operated by the CCX 17s is a maximum of 9 loops, regardless of the number of connected CCX 17s.

Selection screen

Display Functions

This screen displays all the labels implemented in the PL7. A figure is associated to each label (from 1 to 9 maximum).To control a loop, the operator must input the corresponding number.After inputting the loop number, the loop controlling screen is displayed.

Pressing the Exit (Ex) button allows you to leave the regulation screens.

Pressing the Refresh (Rf) button allows you to refresh the screen. This operation must be performed after deleting or adding loops via the PL7 in connected mode.

Ex

Rf

1 : TEMPERA4 : FURNACE7 : TANK

2 : DEBIT15 : LEVEL8 : HOPPER

3 : DEBIT26 : BOILER9 : MIXER

LOOP SELECT :

Ex

Rf

0

Note: If the application has no accessible PID via the CCX 17 (whether there is no PID in the application, or the PID’s existing DEVAL_MMIs are all at 1), the "NO PID" message is displayed. The Exit and Refresh buttons keep their functions.

268


Controlling a loop

Introduction This screen supports control over the setpoint, command and Manual/Auto mode values. The PV_INF and PV_SUP values are also displayed and controlable via this screen and they allow you to set the scale of the measurement in physical units.

Selection screen

Display Functions

The Manual/Auto screen is highlighted. Every time you press the associated command button you switch from one mode to the other. In automatic mode, controlling an output is not authorized.

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys. The operating mode is as follows: as soon as the screen is displayed, it is the SP value which is selected (highlighted), then using the down arrow button, OUT (if manual), LESS and MORE. Pressing MOD supports switching into input mode (press MOD again to exit it).

The Dn button gives access to the adjustment screen and to return to the loop selection screen use the UP button. (the PV, SP, OUT, LESS and MORE values are displayed as integers with 2 significant figures after the comma).

PV, SP, LESS and MORE are in physical units. OUT is in percentage.

Up

Dn

PVSPOUT

FURNACE

: 66,00 units: 51,50: 45,00

Up

Dn: 100,00

: 100,00

SUP

INF

AUTO

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

269


Adjusting a loop

Introduction This screen supports adjustment of the PID parameters (KP, TI, TD, TS) as well as the output limits OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX.

Selection screen

Display Functions

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys.As soon as the screen is displayed, the KP value is displayed (highlighted).

The KP parameter has no unit. TI, TD and TS are in seconds. OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX are in percentage.

Pressing the Up button returns you to the loop controlling screen.

Up

TI(s)Ts(s)OUT_MIN

FURNACE

: 0,0: 1,0: -20,00

Up :

: 0,0 0: 20,00

KP

TD(s)PV_DEVOUT_MAX

1,00

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

270


PID_MMI Function: programming

Introduction The PID_MMI function supports establishment of the dialog with the PLCs to which the CCX 17 is connected. A PID_MMI function is necessary via CCX 17 for the steering, the display and the adjustment of the application’s PIDs.

The PID_MMI function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PID_MMI function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PID_MMI function.

Note: Inputting a PID_MMI function must be done in the task with the slowest period containing PIDs (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.Example: An application with:

a FAST task at 10*10-3 s containing PIDs,

a MAST task at 50*10-3 s containing PIDs,the PID_MMI function must therefore be programmed in the MAST task.

Parameters

Call display


Call format

EF

Parameters of the FUNCTION:


ADDR

---

-

-

Name

EN EBOOLAR_W IN

IN/OUT Activation of DOP on CCX17Topological address of the destination CCX17 [ta>>


)PID_MMI ( ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%MW10:5,%MW45:62

BUTT AR_X 5 bit table linked to the command buttons>>PARA AR_Y PID_MMI parameters [62 word table]

IN/OUTIN/OUT

DFB

Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical sizeManagement of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PIDMixed PID regulator


SERVOGRAFCETStalling functionsOrphee Function

Integer tables

Single precision realsProcess Control

1.002.002.10

2.10

2.222.01 2.01

ADR#0.0.4%M1%M10:5%MW45:62

271


Syntax The PID_MMI function’s call syntax is:

PID_MMI (ADDR, EN, BUTT, PARA)

Parameters of the PID_MMI function

The table below presents the different parameters of the PID_MMI function.

Example of the CCX 17:If the CCX 17 is connected directly to the PLC’s (UNI-TELWAY) AUX socket, it is at the UNI-TELWAY 4-5 slave addresses.The coding can be done: via immediate value: PID_MMI(ADR#0.2540.0.4,....) or simply:

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,....), via a table of 6 words: %MW10:6 := ADR#0.0.4 PID_MMI(%MW10:6,...).

Synchronization of the dialog operator

The CCX 17 can be used to show screens other than the regulation screens. The IN bit is there to activate/deactivate the regulation dialog operator.Setting IN to 1 activates the regulation operator dialog and is displayed on the PIDs’ selection screen.


Description

ADDR %MWi:6 IN CCX 17’s address

EN %Mi IN / OUT Activation of the regulation operator dialog.The application puts this bit to 1 and the PID_MMI function puts it back to 0 when you exit the regulation operator dialog (press Ex)

BUTT %Mi:5 IN / OUT Bits associated to the CCX 17 buttons.These bits allow you to drive different screens as well as Manual/Auto.

PARA %MWi:62 IN / OUT Parameters of the PID_MMI.The first 4 are the words of the communication report.

Note: The 4 words of the report are the same as in all the asynchronous communication functions (communication OF, integrated OF DOP and OF PID_MMI). However the OF PID_MMI automatically manages these words and the application never has to modify them. They are provided for information.For more information, refer to the Dialog operator (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1).

272


Examples The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

%MI is associated to the IN bit (display switch on the operator). The alarm management application is always activated, just like the regulation operator dialog.

(*Management of display communication on the CCX 17*)

SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%KW20.6,%MW30:5)OPERATE

%M1

(*DOP application for the display of screens relative to PL7 *)

%L1

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%M10:5,%MW45:62)OPERATE

(*DOP application for the display of adjustment screens *)

(*Exchange flag bit calculation in progress *)

%MW45:X0

%MW200:X0

P

MSG_in_progress

error ala_900

R

OPERATE

(*Send alarm upon error appearance *)

SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%KW140:29,%MW200:4)error MSG_in_progress %M1

ala_900

S

rz_ala_900

R

OPERATE

(* Cancellation of the alarm if it is sounded *)

PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%KW170:3,%MW200:4)ala_900 rz_ala_900

rz_ala_900

S

273


Management of the command buttons

When the PID_MMI is activated (IN at 1), it assigns the CCX 17 command buttons. If the application uses these buttons for anything but regulation, they must be reassigned on the falling edge of IN (using the ASSIGN_KEYS function described in the DOP (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1)). On the other hand, if the CCX 17 is only for regulation, it is advised that you carry out a non-conditioned SET of the IN bit in the application.

Selection of the PIDs managed by the PID_MMI function

Each PID possesses a bit type DEVAL_MMI parameter. If this bit is at 1, the PID is not managed by PID_MMI. It is the only available level of protection. Moreover, if the application has more than 9 PIDs, it is the way to master those that are handled by the PID_MMI.

Alarm management

It is up to the user to program his/her own alarm management. This overlays itself on the management of the regulation screens.

If an alarm (coming from the dialog operator’s application) goes off while one of the 3 regulation screens is displayed, the CCX_17 is then dedicated to managing the alarm messages. When you return to the regulation operator dialog, the screen appears incomplete. Up/Dn or Refresh allows you to refresh this screen.

Several PID_MMI functions

It is possible to connect several CCX 17 terminals to the same PLC, so it can be useful to have several PID_MMI in the same application.In this case, the different PID_MMI must be executed consecutively (no integrated PID call) via the same PL7 task.

274


Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

Introduction This paragraph describes the performance of the PID_MMI function according to the different operating modes of the PLC and the CCX 17: warm restart, crossing into Run or Stop, reconnecting to the CCX 17.

Warm start This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.If a problem such as a micro-outage on the PLC occurs while sending a message, the command is not repeated. It is therefore necessary to reinitialize the dialog by activating the IN bit via the application program.

STOP/RUN and RUN/STOP crossing

In STOP, the PID_MMI function is no longer active. Nevertheless, you can still output parameters belonging to the displayed screen. In STOP/RUN, the function goes back to the state it was in before crossing into STOP.

Power outage or reconnecting to the CCX 17

With a power return or reconnection to the CCX 17, this reinitializes the communication with the PLC. Periodically, the PID_MMI reassigns the CCX 17’s command buttons. So after 20 seconds or more, pressing one of the first 3 buttons will display one of the regulation screens (preferably the Ref or Dn button on the left of the second row).

Cold start It is only on a cold start that the regulation screens are reset.

Note: Via the application, it is also possible to detect the presence of the CCX 17 by using the language words associated to the communication channels and to manage the dialog reset via the IN bit.

275


276

11
Characteristics of the functions
Introduction

Aim of this Chapter

This chapter presents the characteristics.



Topic Page

Memory occupency 278

Function running time 279

277

Characteristics

Memory occupency

Table The memory occupation of the functions is as follows:

Function Generated code volume

PID 2,2 K words

PWM 2,2 K words

SERVO 1,2 K words

PID_MMI 4,4 K words

278

Characteristics

Function running time

Table The running time of the functions is as follows:

Function Running time

Address Symbol Task

PID (TI=0 et TD=0) 1,2 ms (1 ms without PID_MMI)

1,7 ms (1,5 ms) 1,1 ms (0,9 ms)

PWM 0,6 ms 0,7 ms 0,5 ms

SERVO 0,6 ms 0,8 ms 0,6 ms

PID_MMI (en=1) 1,3 ms 1,4 ms 1 ms

279

Characteristics

280

12
Example of application
Introduction

Aim of this Chapter

This chapter presents an example of application.



Topic Page

Description of the application example 282

Configuration of the example 284

Programming the example 287

281

Example

Description of the application example

Context This is about maintaining the water temperature of an open air swimming pool at a required value. This value itself is determined according to the ambient air temperature.

A discrete regulation is generally used in this type of installation. It is suggested that in this example, you substitute it for a proportional regulation with a modulated output, which should support reduction in the size of the temperature oscillations around the required value.

Measuring the water temperature as well as the ambient temperature is done using a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.

Setpoint

Pump

TT

Air Temp.

Measure Output

Reheater

Water Temp

Setpointcalcualation

Regul

T_CYCL

Discrete regulation Proportional regulationTemperature

required

Output

282

Example

The setpoint of the water temperature depends on the exterior temperature according to the below law:

A HIGH TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if the water temperature exceeds 32°C, A LOW TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if it falls below 22°C, A REGULATION ERROR alarm will go off if the SETPOINT/MEASUREMENT

gap exceeds 2°C in either direction, The regulation will become inoperative (output at 0) in case the pump stops.

30°C

24°C

5°C 35°C Temperatureoutside

Temperatureof the water

283

Example

Configuration of the example

Hardware configuration

To execute this application you need: a TSX 57-103 PLC, a discrete TSX DEY 32D2K input module, a discrete TSX DSY 08R5A output module, a TSX AEY 414 analog input module.The configuration is therefore as follows:

Allocation The discrete %Q2.0 output is allocated to the heater command.

The discrete %Q2.1 output is allocated to the pump command.

The discrete %Q2.2, %Q2.3 and %Q2.4 outputs are allocated to the alarms.

The %M0 bit is used to select the regulator’s AUTO/MANUAL operating mode.

The discrete %I1.1 and %I1.2 inputs support modification of the setpoint value in AUTO mode and value of the output in MANUAL mode according to the following algorithm: %I1.1 = 1 increase of 0.1% per cycle, %I1.2 = 1 decrease of 0.1% per cycle.

The %I1.3 input provides the state of the pump.

%IW3.0 and %IW3.1 are the analog input values.

0 2 3 4

PSY

2600

TSX

57103

1

DEY

32D2K

AEY

414

DSY

08R5A

284

Example

Circuit diagram of the regulation loops

The PID’s regulator direction is in REVERSE (an increase of the measurement must correspond to a decrease of the output).

Configuration Rack configuration

Parametering of the TSX DEY 32D2K module channels

Parametering of the TSX DSY 08R5A module channels

Monitoring overheats driving

Air Temp.

TSX AEZ 414Probe Pt100

%IW3.2Probe Pt100

Water Temp.

Monitoring overheats heater

Th K

Th J

%IW3.1

%IW3.0

AUTO

%IW33

PID1

Setpoint Calculation

EXIT MANU

Measure

To resistance of heating

Setpoint

PID

PWM

%Q4.0

+

-

Slot Family Reference

0 Processors TSX 57103

1 Discrete TSX DEY 32D2K

2 Discrete TSX DSY 08R5A

3 Analog TSX AEY 414

Channel Address Symbol Task

0 %I1.0 - MAST

1 %I1.1 Consig_increm MAST

2 %I1.2 Consig_decrem MAST

3 %I1.3 Etat_pompe MAST

4 %I1.4 Act_pompe MAST

5 %I1.5 - MAST

6 %I1.6 Valid_dop_reg MAST

7 %I1.7 - MAST

.. .. .. ..

31 %I1.31 - MAST

Channel

Address Symbol Task Fallback mode

Fallback value Resetting

0 %Q2.0 Com_rechauf MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed

1 %Q2.1 Com_pompe MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed

285

Example

Parametering of the TSX AEY 414 module channels

Configuration of the bits, words and function blocks

2 %Q2.2 Alarm_temp_haut MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed

3 %Q2.3 Alarm_temp_bas MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed

4 %Q2.4 Alarm_def_reg MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed

5 %Q2.5 - MAST Fallback Fallback to 0 Programmed



Channel

Address Symbol Task Fallback mode

Fallback value Resetting

Channel

Address Symbol Range Scale Min Max Unit Filtering Task Wiring test

0 %IW3.0 Temp_eau Pt100 User 0 500 °C 0 MAST Inactive

1 %IW3.1 Temp_air Pt100 User -200 800 °C 0 MAST Inactive

2 %IW3.2 Surchauf _moteur

Thermo J User 0 1000 °C 0 MAST Inactive

3 %IW3.3 Surchauf _rechauf

Thermo K User 0 1000 °C 0 MAST Inactive

Bit Words Function blocks

Internal (%M): 256System (%S): 128

Internal (%MB,%MW,%MD,%MF): 512System (%SW,%SD): 128Common (%NW): 0Constant (%KB,%KW,%KD,%KF): 128

Serial timer(s) 7 (%T): 0Timer(s) (%TM): 64Monostable(s) (%MN): 8Counter(s) (%C): 32Register(s) (%R): 4Drum(s) (%DR): 8

286

Example

Programming the example

Proposed processing method

The block PID1 is assigned to temperature process control. The temperature setpoint is calculated on the basis of the ambient temperature.

On reconnection to the mains, the process control operating mode is selected and the pump is started.

The state of the controller is conditioned by the operating state of the pump. If the pump is faulty the PID switches to MANU and the output is forced to 0.

The status word bits (process value high threshold, process value low threshold, deviation high threshold and deviation low threshold) are used to generate alarms.

The PID loop coefficients will be initialized to: KP = 600 TI = 300 TD = 50The display on the CCX is as follows: KP = 6 TI = 30 TD = 5These values can of course be fine-tuned during a subsequent adjustment phase.

MAST-MAIN (*Initialization of constants on cold restart-> PID loop buffer and initialization of PWM period to 10 s*)

%LO

%SW10:XO OPERATE

OPERATE

%MW55:=1000

%MW10:10:=%KW10:10

287

Example

(*Pump activation *)

(* PID loop controller operating mode management. This program allows the CCX17 to modify the A/M bit *)

(* Initialization of water temperature setpoint to 27 °C *)

(* Execution of the temperature process control loop *)

%L1O

%I1.4 %Q2.1

%L11

%I1.3 %M10

%I1.3

S

R

%M10

OPERATE

%MW11:=0

N

P

%MW10:=5400

OPERATE

PWM(%MW53,%Q2.0,%MW55:5)

OPERATE

(1)

OPERATE

%L12

288

Example

(* Management of process value alarms *)

(* Management of deviation alarms *)

(* PID loop controller on CCX17 *)

%Q2.2

%Q2.3

%L15

COMPARE

COMPARE

%IW3.0>6400

%IW3.0<4400

%Q2.4

%L16

COMPARE

%MW60<-400

COMPARE

%MW60>400

OPERATE

(%MW60:=%IW3.0-%MW10)

%I1.6

%L20

OPERATE

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%I1.6,%MO:5,%MW100/62)

S

289

Example

290

13
Appendices
At a Glance

Overview This Chapter reviews several aspects of the process control application.



Topic Page

PID parameter adjustment method 292

Role and influence of PID parameters 294

291

Appendices

PID parameter adjustment method

Introduction Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and Nichols which have two variants: closed loop adjustment, open loop adjustment.Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction: if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement,

make the PID inverted (KP > 0), on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).

Closed loop adjustment

This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

- Kp Ti Td

PID Kpc/1,7 Tc/2 Tc/8

PI Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc -

Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.

Measure

Tc

time

292

Appendices

Open loop adjustment

As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .

The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size (% of the scale) as the regulator output.According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures (glass industry,…) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.

- Kp Ti Td

PID -1,2 Tg/Tu 2 x Tu 0,5 x Tu

PI -0,9 Tg/Tu 3,3 x Tu -

Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the value obtained for KP by 100.

Output

Process responseIntegratorMeasure

Tg

S

M = S

Tu

t

t

293

Appendices

Role and influence of PID parameters

Influence of proportional action

Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. The higher the gain, the faster the response, and the lower the static error (in direct proportion), though the more stability deteriorates. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Kp too high

Kp correct

Kp too lowStatic error

°C

t

294

Appendices

Influence of integral action

Integral action is used to cancel out static error (deviation between the process value and the setpoint). The higher the level of integral action (low Ti), the faster the response and the more stability deteriorates. It is also necessary to find a suitable compromise between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

where Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and Td = derivative time.

Note: A low Ti means a high level of integral action.

Ti too high

Ti correct

Ti too low

t

C

295

Appendices

Influence of derivative action

Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of the speed of variation in the deviation, which makes it possible to anticipate changes by accelerating process response times when the deviation increases and by slowing them down when the deviation decreases. The higher the level of derivative action (high Td), the faster the response. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

t

C

Td too high

Td correct

Td too low

296

Appendices

Limits of the PID control loop

If the process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:

where: =model delay,

= model time constant,

The process control performance depends on the ratio

The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2- -20

For <2, in other words for fast control loops (low ) or for processes with a large delay (high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more complex algorithms should be used.

For >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.

H p( )( ) Ke

τ–( )p( )1 θp+( )

--------------------=

τθ

100%

Measure = M0

Measure = M0+∆M

∆M

θτ tτθ---

τθ---

τθ---

θ

τθ---

297

Appendices

298

III
Weighing Application
At a glance

Aim of this part This part introduces the application-specific Weighing function on the TSX/PCX57 PLC and describes its implementation with the PL7 Pro and Junior software.




14 General Introduction to the Weighing Dedicated Function 301

15 Configuration of the Weighing application 311

16 Weighing programming 327

17 Calibrating the measurement string 367

18 Debugging the weighing function 377

19 Protecting the adjustments 385

20 Operating a weighing application 391

21 Diagnostics of the weighing application 397

22 Examples of the weighing program 401

299

Weighing Application

300

14
General Introduction to the Weighing Dedicated Function
At a Glance

Aim of this Chapter

This Chapter introduces the weighing dedicated function on TSX/PCX 57 PLCs.



Topic Page

Description of the weighing package 302

Operation of the weighing module 304

Implementing the Weighing Application 306

Weighing Application Terminology 308

301

General Introduction

Description of the weighing package

General The whole weighing package consists of: the weighing module, a weight indicator, sensors. The application specific weighing function supports software implementation of a weighing application around this hardware device.

Illustration The below illustration shows the standard elements of the weighing package.

2

1

3

302


Description The following table describes the elements of the weighing package.

Address Element Description

1 Weighing module

The ISP Y101 weighing module is the central element in the weighing string. It has: a measurement input able to receive up to 8 sensors, a link for the display panel, 2 "discrete" reflex outputs for adjusted dosage applications.

2 Weight indicator

The TSX XBT H100 remote display panel displays the measured weight with no previous configuration.

3 Sensors Detection of the measurement occurs through the strain gauge sensors.

303


Operation of the weighing module

General In the PLC’s environment, the module has its own set of data in the same way as the other modules.This information is used for the exchanges (reports and commands) with the processor.

Circuit diagram The following circuit diagram of the operation shows the processes executed by the module and supports access to all the elements to be configured.

SensorsMonitoringthe measure

Processorexchange

Display

1 2

3

4

5

Processing the measure

Outputsmanagement

304


Description of operation

The following table describes the different operation phases of the module.

Phase Operation Description

1 Processing the measurement

The signal from the weighing sensors is: converted, the measurement is filtered according to the choice made on the

configuration screen, put on the scale, the scale’s characteristics are determined from

a calibration.

2 Monitoring the measurement

The measurement coming from the process undergoes the following checks: monitoring the underload, monitoring the stability defined by a stability format and a

stability time, monitoring the presence of anything in the zero zone.

3 Exchanges of data with the processor

The module receives and processes the commands from the processor (Set to zero, tare mode semi-automatic, …).It also prepares the data in a suitable format for display on the TSX XBT H100.It sends various information up to the processor such as the gross weight, the net weight, the debit, the tare and the statuses.

4 Displaying the data

The TSX XBT H100 displays the manual weight and tare in the unit chosen in the configuration as well as 4 extra pieces of information: the net weight, the stability, the presence of anything in the zero zone and the unit of the weight.

5 Output management

The card can directly manage 2 discrete outputs and control them according to the thresholds transmitted to the module by the application program.The elements used to manage this are: the transfer thresholds, the weight development direction (Weighing or Down weighing), the logic of output transfer.

305


Implementing the Weighing Application

At a Glance Implementing the weighing application requires the physical context in which it will be executed (rack, supply, processor, modules or devices, etc.) to be defined and implementation of the software to be carried out.This latter aspect is performed by the different PL7 editors: either in local mode, or in offline mode.

Implementation Principle

The table below presents the different dedicated weighing function implementation phases.


Local Declaring the module Choice: of geographical position: number and slot of module in the rack, of the module type.

Configuring the module channels (See Configuration of the Weighing application, p. 311)

Entering configuration parameters.

Enabling configuration parameters. (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1)

Enabling a new module.

Globally confirming the application (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1)

Enabling a new application.

Local or connected

Symbolization (See Presymbolization, p. 333)

Symbolizing variables associated with the application-specific function.

Programming (See Weighing programming, p. 327)

Programming functions the application should perform using:bit and word objects associated with the module,

306


Connected Transfers Transfers the application to the PLC.

Calibration (See Calibrating the measurement string , p. 367)

Calibrating the measuring circuit.

Debug (See Debugging the weighing function, p. 377)

Debugging the application using: debug help screens, which allow the status of inputs and

outputs to be visualized, diagnostics screens, which allow faults to be identified.

Protecting adjustments (See Protecting the adjustments, p. 385)

Protecting adjustments made.

Local or connected

Documentation Printing different information that relates to the application.

Connected Operation (See Operating a weighing application, p. 391)

Operating the application using: debug help screens, which allow the principal information

about the weight measurement to be visualized. TSX XBT H100 remote displays.

Connected Diagnostics (See Diagnostics of the weighing application, p. 397)

Protecting parameters associated with the measurement.


Note: The order below is purely for indication purposes, as PL7 software allows editors to be used interactively in whichever order is desired. (Nevertheless, you can use the data or program editors without having configured the weighing module in advance).

307


Weighing Application Terminology

Limit Load (Lim) The maximum static load that can be supported by the instrument, without permanently altering its meteorological qualities.

Zero Load Tare weight of load receiver when equipped with its mechanical accessories (vibratory extractor, screw, trap, screw jack, etc.). It does not appear in the weight indication but must be taken into account when calculating the maximum load of the sensors.

Set to Zero Device

Device allowing the indicator to be "recalibrated" in the event of a deviation from zero (due to dirt accumulation, for example). This operation can only be carried out in the extent of zero calibration range (+/-2% or +/-5% of the maximum range according to the weighing instrument).

Tare Predefining Device

Device allowing a predefined tare value to be subtracted from a gross weight value and indicating the result of the calculation. The weighing range is consequently reduced.

Tare Device Device allowing the instrument indication to be moved to zero when a load is positioned on the load receiver: without encroaching on the weighing range of net loads (tare additive device), or reducing the weighing range of net loads (tare subtracting device, such as

TSX ISP Y101).

(Weighing Instrument) Indicator Device

Part of load measuring device from which direct reading of result is obtained (TSX XBT H100).

Load Receiver Device

Part of instrument that will receive the load.

Scale Division Value in mass units, expressing the difference between two consecutive indications for one numerical indication.

Calibration Graduates a piece of measuring apparatus.

Weighing Range Interval between maximum and minimum weight.

308


Weighing Instruments

Measuring instruments, which determine the mass of a body using the force of gravity.These instruments can also be used to determine other sizes, quantities, parameters or characteristics linked to the mass. According to the way they function, weighing instruments are either classified as automatic or non-automatic functioning instruments.

Non-Automatic Functioning Weighing Instruments

Weighing instruments that require the intervention of the operator during the weighing process, in order to deposit loads on the load receiver device and retrieve loads from it, for example, as well as to obtain the result. These instruments allow the weighing result to be directly observed, either displayed or printed out. The two possibilities are covered by the word "indication".

Metrology The science of weights and measures.

Lead Sealing Sealing a piece of apparatus with lead. The positioning of a rider in the weighing module ensures this function.The objective of this device is to guarantee measurement conformity. The accessible parameters only have influence on the aspects of the automatic action's exploitation of module information. the unit, weight, scale division, etc, are read only).

Gross Weight Indication of the load weight on an instrument when no tare or predefining device has been used.

Net Weight (Net) Weight indication of a load placed on an instrument after a tare device has been used.

Net weight = Gross weight - Tare weight

Maximum Weight (Max)

Maximum weighing capacity, not taking account of the additive capacity of the tare.

Minimum Weight (Min)

Load value under which weighing results can be marred by a relative error that is too large.

Tare Load placed on the load receiver along with the product to be weighed. For example: product packaging or container.

Taring Action allowing the instrument indication to be moved to zero when a load is positioned on the load receiver.

309


Tare Value (T) Weight value of a load, determined by a tare weighing device.

Predefined Tare Value (PT)

Numerical value, representing a weight, which is entered into the instrument at configuration or by program.

Zero Tracking Device allowing slow derivations from zero to be made up, within the limits of the extent of the zero range.

310

15
Configuration of the Weighing application
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter describes how to select and modify the parameters of the weighing module’s configuration.



Topic Page

Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen 312

Weighing Module Configuration Parameters 313

How to modify the task parameter 314

How to modify metrological information 315

How to modify the zero 317

How to modify the data format 318

How to modify the stability 319

How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering 320

How to Modify the Flow Calculation 322

How to Modify the Tare 323

How to Modify the Threshold Check 324

311

Configuration

Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen

General The configuration information allows measuring characteristics to be defined and the module's operation to be adapted to the application it is intended for.

Illustration This screen gives access to the visualization and modification of configuration parameters.

Description The table below introduces the different zones on the configuration screen.

1

2

3

TSX ISP Y101 [RACK 0 POSITION 4]

Designation: 1I. WEIGHING 3 FILTERS

Symbol:Channel: Function: Task:

Configuration

Weighing

0

MAST

kg0.0000

kg

4

Filtering

4 Flow

Calculate on measure-ments

Value:Predefined

Tare

Threshold check

Direction:

Outputs Active Phase 1:

LF Mask Time:

Weighing

S0 S0 and S1

Downweighing

Low Flow (LF)High Flow (HF)

Active

Metrological DatakgUnit:

+9dOverload Threshold:

0.01Scale Division (d):

.00 150

kg

Max Range (MR):

Zero Format of data

Stability

Cut-off points

LegalHigh resolution

1Time:

3Format range: /.e

s

:±2%MRRecalibration range:Zero Tracking

s

kg0.0000

F1:

0F2: 0F3:

KG

F1

T0.1


1 Title bar Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position as well as the rack number.

2 Module zone Allows the type of screen to be selected: Configuration, Calibration, only accessible in offline mode, Debug only accessible in offline mode.Displays the designation of the selected module.Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View → Module Zone command.

3 Channel zone Gives access to modification of the module's parameters.

312

Configuration

Weighing Module Configuration Parameters

Parameters List The following table lists the parameters, which can be accessed during configuration.

Parameters Default configuration

Possibilities Unit

Task Mast Mast or Fast -

Metrology/Unit kg kggtlboz<none>

kilogramgramton (metric)pound (=453g)ounce (=28.35g)no unit

Metrology/Max Weight 150 from 0 to 65,535 in the weight unit chosen

Metrology/Scale division 0,01 1, 2 or 5 10n in the weight unit chosen

Metrology/Overload threshold +9 d +9 d+2% PM+5% PM

scale divisions% of Max W% of Max W

Zero/Zero tracking Inactive Inactive or active -

Zero/recalibration range +/-2% MW +/-2% MW,+/-5% MW

-

Data format Legal LegalHigh resolution

-

Stability/Extent of Range 3 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8 1/4 of the scale division

Stability/Time 1 0.4, 0.5, 0.7 or 1 seconds

Filtering/CoefficientsF1F2, F3

40

from 0 to 19 -

Flow/Calculation 4 2, 8, 4, 16 32 or 64 measurements

Tare Not predefined Not predefined or predefined in the weight unit chosen

Threshold check Inactive Inactive or Active -

LF mask time 0 0 to 1.5 seconds per 0.1s step seconds

Output logic Weighing Weighing or Downweighing -

Phase 1 active outputs S0 S0 or (S0 and S1) -

Cut-off points LF and HF 0 from 0 to Max W in 1/100 of the unit

313

Configuration

How to modify the task parameter

At a glance This parameter defines the task processor in which the input acquisition and the output update take place.The possible choices are: The MAST task The FAST task

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for defining the task type assigned to the module.

Note: Modifying this parameter is only possible in local mode.

Step Action

1 Access the hardware configuration screen from the weighing module.

2 From the pull-down menu, click Task.Result: a drop-down list appears.

3 Select the required task.

4 If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

TaskMASTMASTFAST

314

Configuration

How to modify metrological information

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following metrological information.

Designation Description

Unit gives you the choice of unit of weight: g: gram kg: kilogram t: ton (metric) lb: pound (lb = 453g) oz: ounce (oz = 28.35g) none: no unit

Maximum Range (MR)

This is the maximum load that it is possible to weigh with the instrument, without considering the weight of the empty load holder (on legal format (See How to modify the data format, p. 318)).

Grade The grade’s value is of the 1, 2 or 5 format that multiplies 10n (n being a positive, negative or non integer with |n| less than or equal to 3.Example: for a grade of 0.002 (if the unit chosen is kg), the measurement is increased 2g at a time.

Overload threshold

This threshold is the value of the surplus weight that the display panel no longer indicates (the overload is therefore indicated by a ‘>‘ line on the display panel).It can take these values: +9 grades +2% of the maximum range +5% of the maximum rangeExample: the maximal range has been established at 150 kg and the grade at 10 g. According to the user’s choice, the utilization limit will be for: 9 grades: Max Range + 9 grades is 150.09 kg +2%MR: 102% of Max Range is 153 kg +5%MR: 105% of Max Range is 157.5 kgNote: the underload threshold cannot be parameterized: it sets the tolerated identifier limit to below zero. It is -2% of the maximum range (underloading is therefore indicated by a ‘<‘ line on the display panel).

315

Configuration

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for setting metrological information.

Note: Because of the industrial environment, select a resolution higher than 3000 pulses as a serious installation precaution. With the programming screen, it will not be possible to enter a higher resolution than 50000 pulses.In other words the following imbalance must be considered:Max Range (RM) ≤ 50000 x Grade.

Step Action

1 Access the weighing module’s hardware configuration screen.

2 Select the values of the Unit, Grade or Overload threshold parameters by using the drop-down lists and enter the Max Range value.


316

Configuration

How to modify the zero

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following information for adjusting the zero.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for setting the zero.


Format print recalibration range

Each zero shift register can be corrected so that it will not go over this print range.It is defined in % of the maximum range. It can take the values: +/- 2% PM (+/- 2% of the maximum range) +/- 5% PM (+/- 5% of the maximum range)

Zero follower This optional function supports correction of any slow losses of accuracy of the zero in the print range of the format (+/- 2% of the maximum range).It is not advised to select this option in automatic installations.

Note: The difference between a slow drift and a real weighing is based on the following rule: all variations of weights lighter than a half-grade whose repetition frequency is sufficiently weak to conserve the stability of the measurement is considered as a drift. The correction created by the function is limited to +/-2% of the counter output’s maximum range. When this limit has been passed, there is no automatic correction.

Step Action

1 Access the hardware configuration screen from the weighing module.

2 Select the format’s print range by using the drop-down lists.

3 If necessary, tick the Zero follower box to confirm this function.


317

Configuration

How to modify the data format

At a glance The configuration screen supports selection of the measurement’s display format.

The value of the weight is given to or entered by the user: either in a fixed point physical unit: legal format or in a hundredth of a fixed point physical unit: high resolution

Example Legal format: The value 3014 means 301.4 kg if the grade is worth 2.10-1kg.

High resolution format: The value 301403 means 301.403 kg if the grade is worth

2.10-1kg. This unit offers more accuracy but it is not accepted by the legal Metrology department.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for the data format.

Note: A fixed point physical unit is called a whole number shown as a unit of weight where a comma can be put.The position of this is given by the grade to the power of ten.

Step Action


2 Check the format of the required data.


318

Configuration

How to modify the stability

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following parameters to set the stability.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for setting the stability.


Format print range

A weight cannot be measured immediately after receiving a load because the inevitable oscillations affect the mechanical part.The stability format shows the size below which the measurement is considered stable.It is parameterized on 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8 quarters of a grade.

Time The stability time shows how long the measurement must stay in the stability format before it is considered stable.It is parameterized on 0.4, 0.5, 0.7 or 1 second.

Step Action


2 Select the format’s print range by using the drop-down list.

3 Select the stability time by using the drop-down list.


319

Configuration

How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering

At a Glance Filters concern the measurement input of the weighing sensors.

By default. PL7 offers a unique filter, which is defined for the total duration of the weighing action.

To increase the speed/precision performance of weighing, 3 distinct filters can be used for one weighing action, as follows: filter F1 associated with phase 1 (default phase), filter F2 associated with phase 2, filter F3 associated with phase 3.Each filter can either have: a sliding average (filtering coefficients from 1 to 11), where the measurement is

the average of the last n values, or be of second order (filtering coefficients from 12 to 19), which are referenced

by their cut-off frequencies.

Measurement Phases

The different phases of a continuous weighing action can be broken down into: a phase 1, where speed is the prime feature of control precision (High flow), a measurement refining phase 2 (Low flow), a final phase 3, where the measurement value differs very little and requires a

high level of precision (Residual flow).

320

Configuration

Filter Coefficients

The following list gives the meanings of filter coefficients:

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for defining filtering:

Value Filter type Characteristics

0 none not filtered

1 sliding average average of the last 2 measurements











12 second order filter cut-off frequency at 15 Hz







19 second order filter cut-off frequency at 0.8 Hz

Step Action

1 Access the hardware configuration screen of the weighing module.

2 If filters F2 and F3 are being used, check the Active box, located in the Threshold Check field.

3 For each phase, select the filtering coefficient from the drop-down menu.

4 Confirm reconfiguration if necessary.

321

Configuration

How to Modify the Flow Calculation

At a Glance You can choose the number of measurements for calculating the flow. (One measurement is taken every 20 milliseconds).

The flow is calculated using the following formula:

Flow n = (Valn - Valn-b)

This is a difference of the value of filtered weights for a number of configured measurements.

Where: b is the number of measurements for the flow calculation, Valn is the value of filtered weight at the instant n, and Valn-b is the value of filtered weight at the instant n-b.

Functioning At each instant, the frequency is calculated and implicitly sent back to the processor as the weight measurement, in order to allow threshold corrections. The flow is always calculated in high resolution format. This calculation can be done on 2, 4,8, 16, 32 or 64 measurements.

By default, the number of measurements is 4.

Example The following figure illustrates a calculation on 4 measurements.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for defining the flow calculation.

20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms

n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5

flow n+1

flow n+4 = Val n+4 - Val nflow n+5 = Val n+5 - Val n+1

flow n

Step Action


2 Select the number of measurements using the drop-down menu.


322

Configuration

How to Modify the Tare

At a Glance The Tare is the weight measurement memorized during the last semi automatic Taring command.However, if necessary, you can introduce a tare value manually. Therefore, this tare value is known as "predefined" or "manual" and can be transmitted to the module. It is expressed in legal format (phys. unit with fixed decimal point).

The tare must be positive or zero and be lower than the Max. Weight.

Once a device of this sort is used, the "predefined" tare (PT) indicator is positioned. It is no longer valid once a Taring order is executed.

Procedure The table below presents the procedure for defining a predefined tare and the tare value.

Note: The entry format extends from 0 to 65,535. If the user wants a greater tare, s/he must modify the scale division and enter the tare accordingly.

Step Action


2 If necessary, check the Predefined box to confirm this function.

Note: If the box is already checked, you must firstly: uncheck this box, confirm the configuration screen, check the Predefined box again.

3 Enter the tare value.

4 Confirm the reconfiguration.

323

Configuration

How to Modify the Threshold Check

At a Glance The threshold check manages the module's discrete outputs: The High flow cut-off point is associated with output S0. The Low flow cut-off point is associated with output S1.The configuration screen gives the following threshold check information.


Active Discrete output management is in operation if this box is checked.It is not checked by default.

Direction The detection direction corresponds to the direction in which the thresholds are recognized, in either: Weighing (filling) Downweighing (emptying)This is the concept of exceeding by a greater value, in the case of weighing, or by a lower value, in the case of downweighing.By default, Weighing is selected.

Phase 1 active outputs

The choice concerns the control of the S0 output on its own, or the S0 and S1 outputs at the same time. See the explanation that follows.By default, the module only activates S0 in the first phase.

Cut-off points The measurement can be associated with 2 thresholds for the following dosages: A High Flow cut-off point and a Low Flow cut-off point. Depending on the logic defined, the S0 and S1 outputs go to zero when these thresholds are met.The threshold values allowed lie between 0 and the maximum weight. They are expressed in high resolution (one hundredth of a physical unit with fixed decimal point).

LF (Low Flow) mask time

It defines the time after the high flow cut-off, during which the module no longer checks the Weight/Threshold;This is to mask the overshoot caused when the product has a drop in voltage. The values allowed lie between 0 and 1.5 seconds per 1/10th sec step. See the explanation that follows.By default, this time is zero.

324

Configuration

Activating Outputs

The following illustration describes the output functioning differences between the choice of active phase 1 Outputs: S0 or S0 and S1.

Net Weight

Time

WeighingLow flow cut-off

pointHigh flow

cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Net Weight

Time

Downweighing

Low flow cut-off point

High flow cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Net Weight

Time

WeighingLow flow cut-off

pointHigh flow

cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Net Weight

Time

Downweighing



Output S0

Output S1

Active output phase 1 (S0)

Active output phase 1 (S0and S1)

325

Configuration

Masking Time The following illustration shows the role of the masking time, the role of which is to mask the overshoot caused when the product has a drop in voltage.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for threshold checks.

Net Weight

Time

Weighing



False cut-off point True cut-off point

Dosage masking time

Total dosage time

Switch to low flow Restart weight

monitoring

Stop dosage

Step Action


2 If necessary, check the Active box to activate the Threshold Check function. All parameters change from gray to black.

3 Click on the buttons corresponding to the detection direction (Weighing ou Downweighing) and to the active phase 1 outputs (S0 or S0 and S1).

4 Enter the Low flow and High flow cut-off points.

5 Select the LF masking time from the drop-down menu.


326

16
Weighing programming
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter describes the principles of programming a weighing application and all of the associated language objects.



Section Topic Page

16.1 General on the weighing programming 328

16.2 Language objects for programmed exchange 335

16.3 Language objects for user-defined exchange 339

16.4 Description of the commands conveyed by program 346

16.5 Modifying the parameters by program 357

327

Programming

16.1 General on the weighing programming

At a glance

The subject of this section

This section describes the general principles of programming a weighing application.



Topic Page

Principle of programming a weighing application 329

Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module 330

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function 331

Presymbolization 333

328

Programming

Principle of programming a weighing application

General Once configured, the weighing module with sensors and associated with a TSX XBT Y100 display panel can function autonomously (without a program). These outputs can be controlled without the intervention of the PLC processor’s program.

Programming the PLC processor supports: Making available weighing information in order to carry out other processes or to

guide other control units, Dynamic modification of the weighing function’s parameters via explicit

commands.

Access to the measurements

The numerical values, measurement of weight (GROSS or NET) and the flow are arranged into 2 double input register words (%ID). They are completed by 1 measurement Status word (%IW), 1 double tare value word (%ID) and 1 double shift register memory word (offsetting the zero) (%ID).The following table lists the numerical weighing values conveyed by the weighing function.

This data is automatically sent back to the processing unit at the beginning of the task associated with the channel, whether the task is in Run or in Stop. The data is directly accessible: via a dialog operator in the application (access to the image objects in the PLC’s

memory), via the terminal by using the animation tables.

Dynamic modification of the parameters

The adjustment parameters entered in configuration can be automatically modified during the course of the program via the WRITE_PARAM explicit exchange instruction.Example: modification of the S0 large flow and S0 small flow cut-off points.

Register address Meaning of the register

%IDxy.0.0 Weight value (GROSS or NET)

%IDxy.0.2 Flow

%IWxy.0.4 Measurement status: stability, zero…

%IDxy.0.5 Tare value

%IDxy.0.7 Shift register memory (offsetting the zero)

329

Programming

Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module

At a Glance Bit and words object addressing is defined in the Common Applications (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1) part.This page introduces specifics linked to weighing modules.

Illustration Reminder of addressing principle:

Specific values The table below gives the values that are specific to weighing module objects.

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F X Y i rSymbol Type of Object Format Rack Position Channel No. Rank

Element Values Comment

x 0 to 10 to 7

TSX/PCX 5710).TSX/PCX 572•/3•/4•).

y 00 to 10 When the rack number (x) is not 0, the position (y) is coded on 2 digits: 00 to 10. Conversely, if the rack number (x) = 0, eliminate the non significant zeros (elimination from the left) from "y" ("x" does not appear and "y" is on 1 digit for values <10).

i 0 or MOD MOD: channel reserved for module management and parameters common to all channels.

r 0 to 16 or ERR

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

330

Programming

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function

Illustration The illustration presents the formation of the different functions executed by the module, and the associated language objects.

Sensors Scaling FilteringF1

Adaptation to the

process

Gross Weight

Net Weight

Flow

Thresholdmonitoring

%MWxy.0.6TareManual tare %MWxy.0.7

%IDxy.0.0

%IDxy.0.2%IDxy.0.5

Measurement number %MWxy.0.14

Weight

Signal

Max range

Low flow

High flow

Weight

Direction

OutputsS0S1

Metrological Data

Stability criterion

Zero

%IDxy.0.7

%MDxy.0.8%MDxy.0.10

- Shift from source

Configuration

%MWxy.0.12%MWxy.0.13%MWxy.0.15%MWxy.0.16

-

+

F1

F2F3

331

Programming

Description The following table describes the main language objects.

Address Type of object to exchange

Role

%IDxy.0.0 Implicit Weight value (gross or net)

%IDxy.0.2 Implicit Flow

%IDxy.0.5 Implicit Tare value

%IDxy.0.7 Implicit Recalibration memory (zero offset)

%MWxy.0.6 Explicit F1 filter coefficient

%MWxy.0.7 Explicit Manual tare

%MDxy.0.8 Explicit S0 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

%MDxy.0.10 Explicit S1 low flow cut-off point (dosage)

%MWxy.0.12 Explicit Logic of outputs S0 and S1 (dosage)

%MWxy.0.13 Explicit LF mask time

%MWxy.0.14 Explicit Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate



332

Programming

Presymbolization

Introduction The weighing application supports automatic symbolization of the language objects associated with the module.

Syntax These objects are symbolized with the following syntax:

PREFIXE_UTILISATEUR_SUFFIXE_CONSTRUCTEUR

The elements have the following characteristics and meanings:

Example This example is about a weighing module situated in slot 3 of the PLC’s tray. If the generic symbol (PREFIXE_UTILISATEUR) given is MESURE, the following symbols are automatically generated.

Element Maximum number of characters

Description

PREFIXE_UTILISATEUR

12 generic symbol given to the channel by the user

SUFFIXE_CONSTRUCTEUR

20 part of the symbol corresponding to the channel’s bit or word object given by the system

Note: As well as the symbol, a comment constructor is automatically generated. This comment reiterates the object’s role.

Address Type Symbol Comment

%ID3.0 DWORD MESURE_POIDS Weight value

%ID3.0.2 DWORD MESURE_DEBIT Flow value

%ID3.0.5 EBOOL MESURE_TARE Tare value

%ID3.0.7 EBOOL MESURE_MEMOIRE_RECALAGE Reset memory value

333

Programming

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure

Deleting the presymbol-ization

Canceling the presymbolization supports, for any given logic channel, deletion of all or some of an object’s symbols.Two options are available:

Step Action

1 Access the variables editor.

2 Access the I/O type variables.Note: The channels whose objects can be symbolized have a letter P on the button on the left of the %CH address.

3 Double click on the P button of the channel to be symbolized.

4 Enter the user access code.Note: If a symbol is already set by the channel, the suggested access code is the restored symbol, shortened to 12 characters.

5 Confirm with the Presymbolize button.

If the option chosen is… Then…

Delete all presymbols No prefix is chosen and all the symbols are deleted (including those that have been modified directly in the editor).

Delete the access-coded presymbols Only the objects that have an identical access code to the one entered are deleted.

334

Programming

16.2 Language objects for programmed exchange

At a glance


This section describes all the weighing module’s objects for programmed exchange.



Topic Page

Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function

336

Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing Application

337

335

Programming

Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function

At a glance These are the bit objects whose exchanges are done automatically in each task cycle in which the module channels are configured.

Bit objects The table below introduces the different bit objects for user defined exchange.

Validity conditions for the measurements and the module

The channel (or module) error bit is there to make sure that the numerical values are valid, so it is necessary to monitor this error bit.

Performance of the error bits

According to the type and seriousness of the errors, the corresponding error bit can be transient (it goes back to 0 when the error disappears) or stored (it stays at 1 even if the error disappears). Only internal errors are stored type, the others are transient errors.

Address (1) Function Meaning when the bit is at state 1

%Ixy.0.ERR Channel bit error Indicates that there is an error with the channel.

%Ixy.MOD.ERR Module bit error Indicates that there is an error with the module.

Caption:

(1) xy = module address. x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

Note With the weighing module, the channel and the module information levels are identical.

Note: The error bit rises to 1 when an error condition appears on the channel (underload/overload,…). To find out the details of the error, you have to monitor the channel status.

336

Programming

Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing Application

At a Glance These are word objects whose exchanges are done automatically at each cycle of the task in which the module channels are configured.

Word objects The table below presents the different implicit exchange word objects.

Address (1) Function Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

%IDxy.0.0 Double status word

Weight value (gross or net).By default, if no taring command has been executed, the weight value is expressed as a GROSS weight. It changes to NET weight as soon as the taring command is executed or a tare has been manually introduced.The measurement is expressed in legal format or high resolution according to the choice created at configuration.


Flow.Example: %IDxy.0.2 = 450 000 signifies that, if the scale division is equal to

1.10-2 kg, a weight difference of 45 kg has been measured between n measurements (sampling every 20 ms).The n number of measurements is defined at configuration.

%IWxy.0.4 Status word Information about the measured value (see details in following table).


Tare value.This word allows the current tare value to be visualized in the same format as the weight. It is memorized by the module.It is reset to 0 at each calibration.


Recalibration memory (zero offset)This word allows the offset to be visualized currently in high resolution format. This value is memorized by the module. It is reset to 0 at each calibration.

Key:


337

Programming

Measurement Status Words

The table below describes the coding of the %IWxy.0.4 status word.

Address (1) Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

%IWxy.0.4:X0 Image of output S0.

%IWxy.0.4:X1 Image of output S1.

%IWxy.0.4:X2 Indicator that voltage is too low. The measurement is deviating. There is a strong possibility of an error on a sensor or in the wiring.

%IWxy.0.4:X3 Voltage too high on module input.

%IWxy.0.4:X4 Sealed module.

%IWxy.0.4:X5 Processing in progress (Taring, Reset, etc.)

%IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration during processing.

%IWxy.0.4:X7 Fault during command.

%IWxy.0.4:X8 NET weight measurement.

%IWxy.0.4:X9 Measurement instability. This is set when the measurement is outside the stability range during the defined time. The extent of the stability range and the time are defined during configuration.

%IWxy.0.4:X10 Zero indicator. This is set when the deviation from zero is not greater than +/- 1/4 of the scale division.

%IWxy.0.4:X11 Zero tracking indicator active.

%IWxy.0.4:X12 Predefined or manual tare indicator (language element specific to module, accessible in read only). This is set when the tare is not the result of a taring command but rather an entry by the user

%IWxy.0.4:X13 Reserved.

%IWxy.0.4:X14 Module in forced calibration.

%IWxy.0.4:X15 Number of converter points.

Key:


338

Programming

16.3 Language objects for user-defined exchange

At a glance


This section describes all the weighing module’s objects for user-defined exchange.



Topic Page

Explicit Exchange Objects 340

Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report 342

Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2 343

Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel 344

Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3 345

339

Programming

Explicit Exchange Objects

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g.: default terminal block, missing module, etc.) and additional commands for advanced programming of application-specific functions.

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the demand of the user program, using the following instructions: READ_STS (read status words), WRITE_CMD (write command words), WRITE_PARAM (write adjustment parameters), READ_PARAM (read adjustment parameters), SAVE_PARAM (save adjustment parameters), RESTORE_PARAM (restoring adjustment parameters).

Note: The configuration constants (See Reading the configuration parameters, p. 363) %[email protected] (@module = module address), are read only and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

340

Programming

Description The table below provides the meaning of the different %MWxy.i.j words.

Address (1) Meaning (for the bit at status 1) Instructions ensuring exchange

%MWxy.MOD.2 Module status READ_STS

%MWxy.0.0 Exchange in progress -

%MWxy.0.1 Exchange report -

%MWxy.0.2 Channel status READ_STS

%MWxy.0.3 Command order (See Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3, p. 345) (calibration, taring, setting to zero, etc.)

WRITE_CMD

%MDxy.0.4 Standard load weight for the calibration command

%MWxy.0.6 F1 filter coefficient WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

RESTORE_PARAM

%MWxy.0.7 Manual tare value

%MDxy.0.8 S0 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

%MDxy.0.10 S1 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

%MWxy.0.12 Logic of S0 and S1 outputs

%MWxy.0.13 Low Flow mask time

%MWxy.0.14 Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate.

%MWxy.0.15 F2 filter coefficient

%MWxy.0.16 F3 filter coefficient

Legend:


341

Programming

Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report

Introduction to "Current Exchange" Word

This word type object with the address %MWxy.0.0 carries information about the current exchanges in the channel.

"Current Exchange" Description

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.0 word.

Introduction to the "Report" Word

This word type object with the address %MWxy.0.1 carries information about the exchange reports in the channel.

"Report" Word Description

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.1 word.


%MWxy.0.0:X0 Current status parameter exchange.

%MWxy.0.0:X1 Current command parameter exchange.

%MWxy.0.0:X2 Current adjustment parameter exchange.

Legend:



%MWxy.0.1:X0 Status parameter exchange fault.

%MWxy.0.1:X1 Command parameter exchange fault.

%MWxy.0.1:X2 Adjust parameter exchange fault.

Legend:


342

Programming

Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2

At a glance This word type object supplies information on the state of the module.

Description The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.MOD.2 word.

Address (1) Meaning (for the bit at state 1)

%MWxy.MOD.2:X0 Internal error: Module is Out of Service.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X1 Functional Error: communication or application error

%MWxy.MOD.2:X2 Unused


%MWxy.MOD.2:X4 Reserved

%MWxy.MOD.2:X5 Configuration Error: the recognized module is not the one anticipated.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X6 Default module is absent or switched off.


Caption:


343

Programming

Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel

At a Glance This word type object carries channel information about the status of channel 0.

Description The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.2 word.


%MWxy.0.2:X0 External error: Overload or underload during calibration

%MWxy.0.2:X1 Range (2) overshoot fault or dynamics lower than 4.5mV at calibration

%MWxy.0.2:X2 External error: saturation of the measurement circuit

%MWxy.0.2:X3 External error: sealed module, configuration refused

%MWxy.0.2:X4 Internal error: module failure

%MWxy.0.2:X5 Configuration fault: the current module is not the one declared at configuration

%MWxy.0.2:X6 Communication fault with the processor

%MWxy.0.2:X7 Application fault

%MWxy.0.2:X8 Protected module error, parameter refused: the module refuses the parameter if it influences the current value.

%MWxy.0.2:X9 Non-calibrated module

%MWxy.0.2:X10 Overload error

%MWxy.0.2:X11 Underload error

%MWxy.0.2:X12 Taring mode

%MWxy.0.2:X13 Zero mode

%MWxy.0.2:X14 Calibration mode

%MWxy.0.2:X15 Forced calibration mode

Legend:


(2) This bit is activated as soon as the gross measured filtered weight value overshoots the overload threshold or is below the underload threshold. The 2 errors can be discriminated by the specific errors: underload error or overload error.

Note All internal fault detection on the module is conveyed by the position control of the discrete outputs to their fallback values (0 electric).

344

Programming

Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3

At a Glance This word type object allows weighing module commands to be sent by explicit exchange (WRITE_CMDinstruction).

Description The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.3 word.


%MWxy.0.3:X0 Save calibration coefficients in module.

%MWxy.0.3:X1 Zero Load calibration.

%MWxy.0.3:X2 Calibration Weight Calibration (Normal condition).

%MWxy.0.3:X3 Cancellation of command (calibration, setting to zero, taring).

%MWxy.0.3:X4 Taring order.

%MWxy.0.3:X5 Reset order.

%MWxy.0.3:X6 Return to GROSS weight order.

%MWxy.0.3:X7 3 second display of manual tare.

%MWxy.0.3:X8 Enable thresholds.

%MWxy.0.3:X9 Disable thresholds.

%MWxy.0.3:X10 Forced calibration (CPU -> Module).

%MWxy.0.3:X11 Save calibration coefficients in processor.

%MWxy.0.3:X12 Calibration weight calibration in degraded condition (Standard load < 70% of maximum weight).

%MWxy.0.3:X13 Unused



Key:


345

Programming

16.4 Description of the commands conveyed by program

At a glance


This section describes the different commands that can be executed by program.



Topic Page

Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program 347

How to carry out the tare mode via the program 348

How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program 351

How to return to gross weight measurement via the program 353

How to display the manual tare via the program 354

How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program 355

346

Programming

Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program

General Sending commands to the module is done using the WRITE_CMD instruction with the following syntax: WRITE_CMD %CHxy.0

This instruction sends the order to the module and awaits its acknowledgement. This wait may require several task cycles.

Monitoring Parameter Recognition

As the module may require several task cycles to recognize commands, two memory words are standardized to monitor the %MWxy.0.0 and %MWxy.0.1 exchanges

The first word %MWxy.0.0 indicates a current exchange.The second word %MWxy.0.1 gives the exchange report.

The following table describes the objects used for monitoring the sending of commands to the module.

Note: The module only interprets one command at a time. If a command is requested while the previous command is being processed, the new command is refused. There should never be more than one bit at 1 in the command word.


%MWxy.0.0:X1 indicates that the command has been sent to the module.

%MWxy.0.1:X1 specifies if the command is accepted by the module.

%MWxy.0.2:X7 signals that a command or parameter has been refused (application fault).

Legend:


347

Programming

How to carry out the tare mode via the program

At a glance This function leads the value of the measured NET weight to zero when a load, or tare, is placed on the load holder.

It therefore supports movement of the measurement with an offset value, in order to make it conform to the user’s expected value.

When no tare mode operation has been carried out, the NET weight is the same as the GROSS weight.

Execution conditions for the tare mode

The Tare mode command’s execution acceptance conditions are the following: The measurement is stable. The measurement is below the maximum range. The measurement is strictly positive.

Note: When changing configuration, all tares are deleted. Any Tare mode execution

cancels all tares input in manual mode and resets the "manual" tare indicator to zero.

Also, an order to return to GROSS weight allows you to delete all tare modes. It does not need any acceptance condition.

348

Programming

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a tare mode operation.

Summary of the data used

The table below provides a table of the data used for a tare mode.

Step Action Performance of the module

1 Input the WRITE_CMD instruction while programming the tare mode order (%MWxy.0.3:X4 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN. The module switches to tare mode and sends the %IWxy.0.4:X5 = 1 TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS report. Acquires the tare.Note: The value of the weight is measured and stored in the associated %IDxy.0.5.It will be taken from all further GROSS weight measurements to determine the NET weight.End of acquisition: TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS = 0

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS: %IWxy.0.4:X5

The module stays in the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS state for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met or until it receives an order to cancel the command.

Type Role Associated data

Command Tare mode order %MWxy.0.3:X4

Display Tare value %IDxy.0.5

Tare mode in progress

%IWxy.0.4:X5

349

Programming

Example The following example in instruction list language describes a tare mode order being sent to the weighing module in slot 2, rack 0.

LD TRUES %MW 2.0.3:X4[WRITE_CMD %CH2.0]

Executing the program involves:

Phase Description

1 Sending the command.

2 Setting the %MW2.0.0:X1 bit to 1, showing that the command is being sent.

3 This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then goes back to 0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

4 The %MW2.0.1:X1 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange. The 0 value shows that the command has been accepted by the module.

Note: %IW2.0.4:X5 stays at 1 (In progress) for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met (waiting for measurement stability, for example). The status channel’s application fault bit is at 1 (module executing command). As for all commands, the order can be cancelled by sending the "cancel command in progress" command.

350

Programming

How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program

At a glance This function leads the value of the measured weight to zero. The zero flag is therefore set.

It is controlled via the Set to Zero command bit. The correction carried out on the measurement is stored in the %IDxy.0.7 word, in high format resolution. It can be saved by the application. This parameter is reset to zero on each calibration.

Execution conditions for setting to zero

The set to zero command’s execution acceptance conditions are the following: The measurement is in GROSS weight. The measurement is stable. The measurement is included in the zero format’s print range, as set in

configuration.

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a set to zero :

Note: When changing configuration, all settings to zero are deleted.


1 Input WRITE_CMDwhile programming the Set to zero order (%MWxy.0.3:X5 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN. The module switches to MISE_A_ZERO mode and sends the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS report.%IWxy.0.4:X5 = 1.The module proceeds to acquire the measurement and stores the new value in the %IDxy.0.7 shift register memory.TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS = 0 shows the end of the procedure.

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS: %IWxy.0.4:X5

The module stays in the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS state for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met or until it receives an order to cancel the command.

351

Programming


The table below provides the data used for resetting to zero.

Example The following example in instruction list language describes a MISE_A_ZERO order being sent to the weighing module in slot 2, rack 0.

LD TRUES %MW 2.0.3:X5[WRITE_CMD %CH2.0]

Executing this order involves:


Command Setting to 0 order %MWxy.0.3:X5

Display Shift register memory %IDxy.0.7

Report In progress %IWxy.0.4:X5

Phase Description

1 Sending the command.

2 Setting the %MW2.0.0:X1 bit to 1, showing that the command is being sent.

3 This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then goes back to 0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

4 The %MW2.0.1:X1 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange.The 0 value shows that the command has been accepted by the module.

Note: %IW2.0.4:X5 stays at 1 (In progress) for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met (waiting for measurement stability, for example).The status channel’s application fault bit is at 1 (module executing command).As for all commands, the order can be cancelled by sending the cancel command in progress command.

352

Programming

How to return to gross weight measurement via the program

At a glance This function cancels the value of the tare so that the value of the current weight is in gross weight.

The current weight is stored in the %IDxy.0.0 word, in the format set in configuration.


This command does not require any particular execution conditions.

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a return to measurement in gross weight.




1 Input the WRITE_CMD while programming the return to measurement in gross weight (%MWxy.0.3:X6 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN. The module switches to "return to gross weight" mode.

The module then sets the tare to zero.

The NET = 0 (%IWxy.0.4:X8=0) flag shows the end of the procedure.

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State of the NET flag: %IWxy.0.4:X8

-


Command Return to gross weight order

%MWxy.0.3:X6

Display Measured weight %IDxy.0.0

Value of the Tare in progress

%IDxy.0.5

Report In progress %IWxy.0.4:X5

Gross weight %IWxy.0.4:X8 = 0

353

Programming

How to display the manual tare via the program

At a glance This function supports display of the manual tare on the display panel for 3 seconds.


For this command, a manual tare must have already been configured.

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for displaying the manual tare.




1 Input WRITE_CMD while programming the display order (%MWxy.0.3:X7 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN. The module manages its data normally.The values displayed on the TSX XBT H100 display panel show the manual tare’s value.

3 After the 3 second delay, the display panel reverts to its current values.

-


Command Tare display order %MWxy.0.3:X7

Display Manual tare The data on the display panel show the manual tare.

354

Programming

How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program

At a Glance These functions are primarily used to coordinate the output command with the processor-managed mechanism. The threshold check option must first be enabled in the configuration screen.

Operating Principle

Action on outputs is performed from the: Enable thresholds command. Once this command has been executed, the threshold check cycle starts. A disable command lets you to stop the threshold check cycle in progress and authorize a new threshold enabling command.If need be, this command will also reset outputs S0and S1 to 0.

Enabling Procedure

The following table describes the procedure for enabling thresholds.

Disabling Procedure

The following table describes the procedure for disabling thresholds.

Step Action Module behavior

1 Make the necessary changes to the threshold values, output logic and mask time.

-

2 Position the threshold enabling order (%MWxy.0.3:X8 = 1).

-

3 Launch threshold enabling using the WRITE_CMD instruction.

The module interprets the request, sets the S0 and S1 outputs and ensures the conformity of the image bits: %IWxy.0.4: Current X0 position of S0. %IWxy.0.4: Current X1 position of S1.

Step Action Module behavior

1 Position the threshold disabling order (%MWxy.0.3:X9 = 1).

-

2 Launch threshold disabling using the WRITE_CMD instruction.

The module sets outputs to idle and image bits to 0.

355

Programming

Summary of Data Used

The table below provides the data used for enabling and disabling thresholds.


Command Threshold enabling order %MWxy.0.3:X8

Threshold disabling order %MWxy.0.3:X9

Display Current flow %IDxy.0.2

High flow threshold %MDxy.0.8

Low flow threshold %MDxy.0.10

Output logic %MWxy.0.12

PD mask time %MWxy.0.13

S0 current position %IWxy.0.4:X0

S1 current position %IWxy.0.4:X1

356

Programming

16.5 Modifying the parameters by program

At a glance


This section describes how to dynamically modify the application’s parameters by program.



Topic Page

Modify Parameters by Program 358

PL7 instructions used for adjustments 360

Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program 362

Reading the configuration parameters 363

357

Programming

Modify Parameters by Program

Principle You can command the modification of certain parameters by program, in order to automatically adapt the measurements to the processing applications.

Example: modifying the tare value by program if several types of product are to be weighed with different conditioning.

List of Adjustable Parameters

The following parameters may be modified by program:

Possible Actions You can: Modify an adjustment parameter by program, Send adjustment parameters to the module, Control the module's parameter recognition, Read the adjustment parameter value in the module and thereby update the PLC

memory, Save the adjustment parameters, Restore the value of saved parameters to the PLC memory.

Adjustable parameters Corresponding data

F1 filter coefficient %MWxy.0.6

"Manual" tare value %MWxy.0.7

Cut-off points (thresholds) %MDxy.0.8 and %MDxy.0.10

Logic of S0 and S1 outputs %MWxy.0.12

LF mask time %MWxy.0.13

Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate

%MWxy.0.14



358

Programming

Instructions Used

The instructions used to do these operations are as follows:

The module can process several adjustments simultaneously.

Instruction Function carried out

WRITE_PARAM %CH xy.0 Send the parameter contents of the previous table to the weighing module.

READ_PARAM %CH xy.0 Reads the adjustment parameters in the module and updates the previously cited table.

SAVE_PARAM %CH xy.0 Saves the adjustment parameter values in the memory zone of the processor. These parameter values will be the ones used when the PLC is started from cold.

RESTORE_PARAM %CH xy.0 Allows the adjustment parameters to be reloaded with the values entered at module configuration or at the last SAVE_PARAM.

359

Programming

PL7 instructions used for adjustments

General To be able to carry out adjustment operations, you must be able to access the module’s own data.

This is done by using the following instructions.

Send the adjustment parameters to the module

Sending the parameters from the module’s channel is done by using the WRITE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

WRITE_PARAM %CH xy.0

This instruction sends the contents of the parameters to the module and waits for its acknowledgement. This can take several task cycles.

Monitoring the acknowledgement of the parameters

As the module can take several task cycles to acknowledge values, two memory words are used to monitor the exchanges: %MWxy.0.0 and %MWxy.0.1 The first word %MWxy.0.0 shows that there is an exchange in progress, The second word %MWxy.0.1 gives the report on the exchange, The bits in position 2 are associated to the adjustment parameters:

The %MWxy.0.0:X2 bit shows that the adjustment parameters are sent to the module,

The %MWxy.0.1:X2 bit specifies whether the adjustment parameters are accepted by the module.

Example Writing the module’s parameters in slot 2 of rack 0,WRITE_PARAM %CH2.0 involves: Sending the adjustment parameters, Setting the %MW2.0.0:X2 bit to 1, showing that the adjustment parameters are

being sent. This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then goes back to 0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

The %MW2.0.1:X2 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange. The 0 value shows that the data has been accepted by the module.

360

Programming

Reading the adjustment parameters

The READ_PARAM instruction supports reading the module’s adjustment parameters and updating the PLC’s memory. It is particularly useful after a WRITE_PARAM that the module has not accepted. Reading the adjustment parameters can take several task cycles.

Reading the adjustment parameters from the module’s channel is done by using the READ_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

READ_PARAM %CH xy.0

Saving the adjustment parameters

The SAVE_PARAM instruction allows you to copy the current values of the module’s adjustment parameters in the backup zone, set in the processor’s memory. The backup zone is not accessible from the language.

This instruction can take several task cycles to be executed. Saving the module’s adjustment parameters is done by using the SAVE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

SAVE_PARAM %CH xy.0

Restoring the saved adjustment parameters

The RESTORE_PARAM instruction supports restoring of the saved adjustment parameter values in the processor’s memory and in the module.Restoring the adjustment parameters from the module is done by using the RESTORE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

RESTORE_PARAM %CH xy.0

361

Programming

Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program

Description The following table describes the parameters that can be adjusted by program, using the WRITE_PARAM instruction.

Word Role Description

%MWxy.0.6%MWxy.0.15%MWxy.0.16

Filter Coefficients The admissible filter coefficient values are between 0 and 19.

%MWxy.0.7 "Manual" tare value The admissible "manual" tare values are between 0 and 65535. They cannot exceed the maximum range.

%MD xy.0.8%MD xy.0.10

Cut-off points (thresholds)

S0 high flow cut-off pointS1 low flow cut-off pointThe threshold values allowed lie between 0 and the maximum weight in high resolution format..If a threshold check has not been defined at configuration, no detection processing is done. The value of these threshold is zero by default.Note: When weighing, HF < LF < Maximum weight In downweighing: LF < HF < Maximum weight The module carries out a coherence check of the threshold values. If this logic is not respected, the thresholds will be refused.

%MWxy.0.12 Output logic %MWxy.0.12:X0 0: Weighing 1: Downweighing

%MWxy.0.12:X1 0: S0 then S1 1: S0 then S1 then S1

%MWxy.0.13 LF mask time Admissible values are between 0 and 15 per 1/10 of a second step (0 = 0s, 1= 0.1s, 2 = 0.2s, etc.).

%MWxy.0.14 Number of measurement for flow

Admissible values are values 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64.

362

Programming

Reading the configuration parameters

General All of the parameters entered during the module’s configuration can be accessed by program in read only.These parameters are coded in 3 words from the %KW constant zone.

Coding the maximum range

Reading the maximum range, which is configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.0 word.

Coding the measurement unit

Reading the unit and the grade, which are configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.1 word.

The measurement unit is coded on 3 bits of the least significant byte.

The following table describes the coding for the unit of measurement.

Bits 0 to 2 Corresponding unit Role

0 g gram

1 kg kilogram

2 t ton (metric)

3 lb pound (= 453g)

4 oz ounce (= 28.35g)

5 <none> no unit

%KWxy.0.1:least significant bit

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

363

Programming

Coding the grade Reading the unit and the grade, which are configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.1 word.

The grade is coded on 5 bits of the most significant byte.

The following table describes the coding for the grade.

Note: The grade is still set in the same unit as the measurement

Bits 8 to 12 Corresponding unit Bits 8 to 12 Role

0 0.001 11 5

1 0.002 12 10

2 0.005 13 20

3 0.01 14 50

4 0.02 15 100

5 0.05 16 200

6 0.1 17 500

7 0.2 18 1000

8 0.5 19 2000

9 1 20 5000

10 2

most significant bit %KWxy.0.1


364

Programming

Coding the stability, the zero, the thresholds, the outputs and the format

Reading the format print range and the stability time as well as the zero format print range, the zero follower’s activity, the overload threshold, the use of outputs and the weight value formats, configured for the measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.2 memory word.

Coding of the %KWxy.0.2 word.

The following table describes the stability print range’s coding (bits 0 to 2).

The following table describes the stability time’s coding (bits 4 to 5).

The following table describes the overload’s coding (bits 8 to 9).

Value read Equivalence in grade

0 2

1 3

2 4

3 6

4 8

Value read Equivalence in seconds

0 0.4

1 0.5

2 0.7

3 1

Value read Type of overload selected

0 Maximum range + 9 grades

1 Maximum range + 2% of the maximum range

2 Maximum range + 5% of the maximum range

most significant bit %KWxy.0.2


Format Outputs Zero follower

Manual tare

Print range Zero

Sensor supply

overload

%KWxy.0.2:least significant bit


Stability time Stability print range

365

Programming

The following table describes the coding for the other parameters. These parameters are all coded on a %KWxy.0.2 word bit.

Bit number

Parameter bit at 0 bit at 1

11 Recalibration range +/-2% of the maximum range

+/-5% of the maximum range

12 Predetermined tare No predetermined tare Predetermined tare

13 Activity of the zero follower

Inactive Active

14 Using the outputs Not used Used

15 Format Legal (fixed point physical unit)

High resolution (100th of a fixed point physical unit)

366

17
Calibrating the measurement string
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter describes how to calibrate the measurement string.



Topic Page

Introduction to the Calibration Function 368

Description of the Calibration Screen 370

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System 371

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program 373

How to Achieve Forced Calibration 375

Performing a Forced Calibration by Program 376

367

Calibration

Introduction to the Calibration Function

General The calibration of the analog measurement system consists in making a weight value correspond to an electrical signal transmitted by sensors.

This adaptation is made on site when the product is set up. It is necessary to ensure the measurement's validity.

Calibration rules Any non-calibrated module is in channel fault (can be seen in the debug screen or on the module, by the flashing of channel 0).

The first calibration must be complete: 1. Zero Load2. Standard Load3. Saveotherwise the information returned means nothing.

Calibration cannot be performed if the PLC processor has a Flash-Eprom memory card (TSX MFP 032P or TSX MFP 064P or TSX MFP 0128P).

Calibration can be redone throughout the module's life. The electronics character-istics do not require regular recalibration. However, legal constraints or the application's mechanical characteristics may require calibration, particularly for commercial transactions.

Note: The calibration function, forced or not, is only accessible in offline mode with the PLC in Run.

Note: Calibration is independent of the configured filter, but takes into account Metrological and Stability Information parameters.

368

Calibration

Calibration Type You can choose one of the following 3 calibration types: normal calibration (The calibration function must be performed with a standard

load weight that is greater than or equal to 70% of the maximum weight), graded calibration (If for various reasons calibration cannot performed under the

conditions previously described), forced calibration:

CPU -> Module: Being able to restore adjustments made to a different module in the event of a maintenance concern or duplication

Module -> CPU: Being able to make the processor parameters conform with the parameters of a calibrated module that is connected to a new slot.

369

Calibration

Description of the Calibration Screen

At a Glance The calibration screen gives access to calibration commands.

Illustration This screen can be only accessed in offline mode.

General Description

The table below shows the different elements of the calibration screen and their functions.

1

2

3

4

Standard Load

Cancel Save

CPU --> ModuleZero load

RUN



Symbol:

Weight

Calibration Forced Calibration

Channel: Function: Task:

Value: KgNET

Calibration

ERR IO DIAG...

DIAG...Weighing0 MAST

137.66

Kg130.00 Module --> CPU

Cancel

Address

Element Function

1 Title bar Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position and the rack number.

2 Module zone Allows selection of screen type, access to the adjustment part of the screen, and to diagnostic functions.Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View → Module Zone command.

3 Visualization zone

Gives access to the weighing information visualization (See Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone, p. 382).

4 Calibration zone

Gives access to calibration commands (See Calibrating the Analog Measurement System, p. 371).

370

Calibration

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System

At a Glance Calibrating can be done on a PL7 station connected to the PLC using the calibration screen.It can also be done using an operator dialog, which uses PL7 language instructions.

The procedure is only enabled if the module has been calibrated correctly. If there is a measurement saturation problem, the new parameters cannot be saved. Either the error must be corrected or the procedure be cancelled, using Cancel.

Procedure This table describes the procedure for calibrating the analog measurement system.

Note: The procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing Cancel. The module reverts to the previous parameters. The current calibration parameters are therefore lost.

Step Action Result

1 Switch the rack on. The product is initialized, carries out self-tests and receives its configuration.

2 Access the calibration screen:1. select Tools → Configuration2. click on the module's slot3. select Calibration from the drop-down menuNote: the processor must be in RUN and the terminal in offline mode.

-

3 Check that the counter output is empty. -

4 Click the Zero Load button to carry out zero load calibration (recognized by the load receiver).

This phase requires around 20 seconds.The Zero Load button switches to reverse image during this phase and an hour glass appears.The module switches to channel fault and all measurements are invalid.The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration_in_progress changes. The module indicates the acquisition of the zero weight reference and processes the reports.

5 Place calibration weight. -

371

Calibration

6 Enter the calibration weight value in the "Standard Load" field (this value is equal to the maximum weight) and click on the Standard Load button.If the command is disabled, an error message indicates the type of problem encountered.

This phase requires around 20 seconds.The module checks the standard load weight against the maximum weight.The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration_in_progress changes.The module acquires the standard load weight reference, processes and positions the report.

7 Click the Save button to recognize the parameters resulting from calibration.

The module and the processor recognize and save the parameters resulting from calibration. During the write phase, the measurement remains in channel fault. This fault disappears as soon as writing is finished (current channels faults and calibration in progress disappear). The measurement is valid.

Step Action Result

372

Calibration

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program

General Several language elements are used to implement and supervise the calibration mechanism.

The calibration screen facilitates the procedure, but it can also be performed by program using reserved data.

Procedure Program the following operations to perform a calibration by program.

Step Action Result

1 Zero weight Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the calibration order of the channel using the zero weight (%MWxy.0.3:X1=1).

The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration in progress changes.This operation enables you to determine the Offset parameter.

2 Standard Load

Load the standard load weight value in the %MDxy.0.4 word

-

3 Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the calibration order of the channel using the standard load weight (%MWxy.0.3:X2=1, or %MWxy.0.3:X12=1 for a graded calibration).

The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration in progress changes.This operation enables you to determine the Gain parameter.

4 Save the parameters in the module

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order of the calibration in the module (%MWxy.0.3:X0=1).

-

5 Copy the module parameters in the CPU

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order in the processor (%MWxy.0.3:X11=1).

-

373

Calibration

Summary of Data Used

The table below shows the data involved in a calibration.


Command type

Save calibration in the module %MWxy.0.3:X0

Zero weight %MWxy.0.3:X1

Standard load weight (Normal) %MWxy.0.3:X2

Forced calibration(CPU -> Module) %MWxy.0.3:X10

Save calibration in the processor %MWxy.0.3:X11

Standard load weight (Graded) %MWxy.0.3:X12

Command parameter

Value of standard load weight %MDxy.0.4

Report Calibration in progress (Normal) %IWxy.0.4:X6

Instability %IWxy.0.4:X9

Overload or underload during calibration

%%MWxy.0.2:X0

Non-calibrated module %MWxy.0.2:X9

Calibration mode %MWxy.0.2:X14

Forced calibration mode %MWxy.0.2:X15

374

Calibration

How to Achieve Forced Calibration

At a Glance This function responds to the needs of speedy maintenance.

Forced calibration allows calibration values from a weighing module to be transferred to the central unit, and vice versa.

Operating Mode Transferring the CPU to the weighing module is always authorized once the CPU has the requisite calibration parameters for the desired slot.

Transferring the weighing module to the central unit requires the module to be calibrated (not forced calibration).

Procedure This table describes the procedure for achieving forced calibration.

Note: This action cannot be reversed. Once the transfer has occurred, it is not possible to cancel the command.

Note: This function is only accessible in offline mode, with the PLC in Run.

Step Action

1 Switch the rack on.

2 Access the calibration screen:1. Select Tools → Configuration2. Click on the module's slot3. Select Calibration from the drop-down menu

3 In the Forced Calibration field, click either CPU -->Module or CPU -->Module, according to the desired transfer direction.

Note: The procedure is not enabled unless the transfer is done correctly. If there is a problem, click the Cancel button in the Forced Calibration field.

375

Calibration

Performing a Forced Calibration by Program

General Several language elements are used to implement and supervise the calibration mechanism. The calibration screen facilitates the procedure, but it can also be performed by program using reserved data.

Procedure Carry out the following operations to perform a forced calibration by program.

Direction of copy

Action Result

CPU -> Module

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order of the calibration in the module (%MWxy.0.3:X10=1).

This operation is used for example when replacing a module. It enables you to automatically restore the calibration parameters in the module (gain, offset and converter configuration.

Module -> CPU

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order in the processor (%MWxy.0.3:X11=1)

This operation enables you to automatically restore the calibration parameters in the processor when, for example, you are using a module that is placed in a new slot.This operation is only possible if the module is calibrated.

376

18
Debugging the weighing function
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter introduces the debugging screen and describes the functions available for debugging the application.



Topic Page

Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function 378

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen 380

Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone 382

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone 383

377

Debugging

Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function

At a Glance The debugging screen allows access to the display of weighing information and access to the adjustment of certain parameters.

Illustration This screen can be only accessed in offline mode.

1

2

3

4

RUN




Debug

ERR IO DIAG...


Weight

Value:

Kg

NET

0.0000

Kg0.1

Kg0.00Kg0.0000

Tare Value:Zero Memory:

Flow:Zero Tracking

Measurement Information

Outputs

0S0

1 0S1

1

4 FlowCalculate on measurements

Kg0.0000

Value:Predefined

Tare

Threshold Check

LF Mask Time:

Kg0.0000Low Flow (LF)High Flow (HF)

Activate

0

Kg100.63

Adjustment

4

Filtering

F1:

0F2: 0F3:

KG

F1T Cut-off points

Direction:

Active Outputs Phase 1:

Weighing

S0 S0 and S1

Downweighing

F2F3

HF

LF

No. Converter Points

Deactivate

s

378

Debugging

Description The table below shows the different elements of the debugging screen and their functions.


1 Title bar Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position and the rack number.

2 Module zone Allows selection of screen type, access to the adjustment part of the screen, and to diagnostic functions.Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View → Module Zone command.

3 Display zone Gives access to the weighing information display.

4 Adjustment zone

Gives access to adjustment of the module's parameters.

379

Debugging

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen

At a glance This zone displays general information on the state of the module or the channel.

Illustration This zone on the screen informs you about the state of the module.

Description The following table describes the different elements of the module screen zone and channel state.

RUN



Debugging

ERR IO DIAG...


Adjustments

Address Description

Debugging Drop-down list of choices of operating modes

Adjustment Check box supporting access to the adjustment functions. When this box is ticked, an extra zone is added to the debugging screen giving access to the parameters.

Indicates whether the module is closed (locked padlock) or not.

RUN Indicator lit: normal operationIndicator unlit: module error or switched off

ERR Indicator lit: internal error, module broken downIndicator blinking: communication error, absent, invalid or faulty applicationIndicator unlit: no error

I/O Indicator lit: External error: overload or underload error during calibration, range overshoot error, measurement error Closed module: configuration refusedIndicator blinking:loss of communication with the processorIndicator unlit: no error

DIAG This light goes red when there is a module level error. The details about the error are accessible via the DIAG button below.

ou

380

Debugging

Channel Equal to zero, the module only has one channel, which is the 0 channel.

Function Weighing

Task Recalls the task in which the module is configured

DIAG This light goes red when there is an error linked to the weighing function. The details about the error are accessible via the DIAG button below.

Address Description

381

Debugging

Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone

illustration This zone is the dynamic display zone containing important information connected to weighing.

Description The following table describes the different elements belonging to the weighing debugging screen’s display zone.

Weight

Value: KgNET

100.63

Kg0.0000 Kg0.00Kg0.0000

Tare Value:Zero Memory:

Flow:Zero Tracking

Measurement Information

Outputs

0S0

1 0S1

1No. Converter Points

Zone Field Description

Weight Nb Converter Pulses

By default, the screen displays the current weight value. Click on the key No. Converter Points will allow you to switch to points mode during the next disconnection of PLC.The display weight will be reapplied when the PLC next runs.

Value The current weight value in a defined unit. If there is a default on the measurement circuit detected by the module or during its calibration mode, the ERR indicator will be displayed on the screen.

NET The NET weight indicator is positioned if the module returns NET weight information, otherwise this relates to GROSS weight.

The "stable measurement" indicator specifies that the measurement is in the defined stability range.

The zero zone indicator is activated when the measured weight is in zero format (+/- 1/4 of the scale indicator).

Outputs The supplied indications correspond to the physical output states S0 and S1.

Measurement Information This zone displays: the flow value, it is indicated by the unit measurement, the current tare value, the memory zero value corresponds to zero shift from the last calibration, the PT indicator specifies the tare value which has been manually introduced and

not measured, the Zero indicator shows that the function has been parameterized.

382

Debugging

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone

Illustration This zone allows you to modify the adjustment parameters.

Description It gives access to the modification and display of the following parameters:

Kg0.0000

Kg0.1

4 FlowCalculate on measurements

Value:Predefined

Tare

Threshold Check

LF Mask Time:

Kg0.0000Low Flow (LF)High Flow (HF)

0

4

Filtering

F1:

0F2: 0F3:

KG

F1T Cut-off points

Direction:

Active Outputs Phase 1:

Weighing

S0 S0 and S1

Downweighing

F2F3

HF

LFs:

DeactivateActivate

Address Description

Filtering (See How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering, p. 320)

You have the possibility to modify for each phase the filter coefficient value of the measurement input.You can choose a value from 0 to 19.Note: The stronger the filter (value from 1 to 11), the longer the response time.

Flow (See How to Modify the Flow Calculation, p. 322)

You have the possibility to modify the number of measurements for the flow calculation.The listed choices carry the values 2, 4, 8 16, 32 and 64.

Tare (See How to Modify the Tare, p. 323)

You have the possibility to introduce a predetermined tare by checking the corresponding box and filling in this tare value in the defined unit.

Threshold check (See How to Modify the Flow Calculation, p. 322): These parameters are only displayed if, during configuration, the "Threshold check" option has been activated. Recognition of all parameters is effected from the confirmation command in the Edit menu.

Activate This key activates the threshold check monitoring cycle.

Deactivate This key deactivates the threshold check monitoring cycle and positions outputs S0 and S1 into fallback mode.

PD mask time Lets the user modify the mask time during switch to low flow.

Weighing/Unweighing direction

Lets you modify the threshold recognition.

Phase 1 active outputs Lets you choose the active outputs during the first dosage phase.

Low flow (PD) and high flow (GD) cut off points

Lets you modify the threshold values.

383

Debugging

384

19
Protecting the adjustments
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter describes how to protect the adjustments done during the previous phases.



Topic Page

Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters 386

How to protect the adjustments 388

Legal metrology and regulations 389

385


Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters

General Any weighing instrument which can be used for commercial transactions must be approved. The parameters associated with the measurement must therefore be protected. It should not be possible to introduce into an instrument, via the interface, instructions or data likely to: falsify the weighing results displayed, change an adjustment factor.

Note: Protection by sealing aims to guarantee measurement conformity, so that the parameters accessible only apply to the exploitation aspects of the module information by the mechanism.

386


Effect of Protecting the Configuration Parameters

There are two types of information. Information, which can be protected (if a module is sealed, this type of information will be available in read only) and information with free access (Read and Write)The table below identifies the characteristics of this information according to the protection put in place.

The information word %IWxy.0.4:X4 (to 1) tells you if the measurement is protected.

Consequences of Protection

A sealed module that receives a different configuration to the one memorized (before being switched off prior to the movement of the rider) is refused.

In this case the module is seen as missing in the PLC diagnostics, but sends a weight to the display.

A sealed module will not accept a new calibration request

Functions Without sealing With sealing

Task Modifiable Modifiable

Flow/ Calculation on n measurements Modifiable Modifiable

Tare/ Predefined Modifiable Modifiable

Threshold checking/ Active Modifiable Modifiable

Threshold checking/ Direction Modifiable Modifiable

Threshold checking/ Active outputs Modifiable Modifiable

Threshold Checking/ Cut-off points Modifiable Modifiable

Threshold checking/ LV Mask Time Modifiable Modifiable

Unit Modifiable Non modifiable

Max Range (MR) Modifiable Non modifiable

Scale Division Modifiable Non modifiable

Overload Threshold Modifiable Non modifiable

Filtering/ Coefficient Modifiable Modifiable

Data format Modifiable Non modifiable

Stability/ Extent of Range Modifiable Non modifiable

Stability/ Time Modifiable Non modifiable

Zero/ Zero tracking Modifiable Non modifiable

Zero/ Recalibration range Modifiable Non modifiable

Note: Using the file lets you keep a paper record for the configuration

387


How to protect the adjustments

Necessary conditions

The calibration and adjustment operations must be completed.

Illustration The following illustration shows how to position the riders in order to protect the adjustments.

Procedure The following table describes the operation of protecting the adjustments (leading).

Backpanel connector

Display block

123

Step Action

1 Take the module out of the PLC rack (the rack can remain switched on).

2 Remove the module’s casing (use a TORX type screwdriver for this).

3 Place the rider in position 2-3 as shown in the illustration.

4 Put the module back into its casing.

5 Replace the module in the rack in its previous position.

388


Legal metrology and regulations

EU approval The set consisting of: load holder + sensors + module can be considered as an IPFNA (non automatic weighing instrument).

As such, and to be able to use it for commercial transitions, it has been approved by the EU.

If it is only used for internal processes, the displayt must have an identification plate mentioning:

If it is used for regulated uses (e.g. commercial transitions), the display must have a identification plate, showing:

Moreover, it must receive a first check on leaving the factory, as well as regular on-site monitoring by a licensed body. Generally, monitoring takes place once a year, and this is the responsibility of the owner.

Trademark Max =Type of instrument e =Serial number‘All transitions prohibited’

Trademark Max =Type of instrument Min =Serial Number e=Number and date of EU approval of typeNumber 97.00.620.016.0

29th September 1997

389


Approval of the model

Measurement and control device for filling machine and a discontinuous counterThis IPFNA can be supplemented by the specific software applications ‘Filling Machine’ or ‘Discontinuous counter’. As such, it has passed national approvals, as a measurement and automatic control device for filling machines and discontinuous counters.

It is therefore up to the manufacturer of the measurer or discontinuous counter to get a complete approval of any automatic weighing instruments made up in this way, in the most straightforward conditions possible.

It is also up to the manufacturer of the machine to install the identification plate and to present the machine for its first check, when necessary.Approval of a continuous counter modelAssociated with a weighing table, it is authorized as a continuous counter device.

Except for when used for commercial transitions, the identification plate shows:

When used for commercial transitions, the identification plate shows:

It must be checked. The first phase of the first check is done in the factory on the complete instrument uncoupled from its conveyor, by means of a movement simulator; the other phases are carried out on the complete instrument.

Class of appliance

With average precision, the appliance covers the range from the minimum (500 scale divisions) up to 6000 scale divisions. These instruments can be authorized or unauthorized to carry out commercial transitions. If it is unauthorized, ‘PROHIBITED FOR ALL TRANSACTIONS’ must be written on the appliance’s front panel.

- QMax mark =- dt type =- Serial number‘All transitions prohibited’

- QMax mark =- dt type =- Serial numberWeighed products:- Max= L =- v= d =

390

20
Operating a weighing application
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter describes the tools that allow you to operate a weighing application.



Topic Page

Ways of displaying weighing information 392

Description of the display transfer 393

Weighing module operating modes 395

391

Operation

Ways of displaying weighing information

Description The following table describes the different ways of displaying weighing information.

Language Objects

The following language objects are used for operating the weighing application.

Ways Description

TSX XBT H100 module’s display panel (See Description of the display transfer , p. 393)

Automatically displays the weight measurement without any prior programming.

Debugging Screen (See Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone, p. 382)

Displays all information relevant to the weighing and allows the modification of certain parameters (See Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone, p. 383).

Animation tables All information about the measurement can be accessed as PLC variables and can be displayed in the animation tables.

Operation screen It is possible to create operation screens (PL7 Pro), using the weighing language objects to display necessary information on the application’s performance there.

Supervision The weighing language objects can be conveyed and operated by a supervision system.

Displayed data Object address

Protected module %MWxy.0.2:X8 (Object for user defined exchange)

Non calibrated module %MWxy.0.2:X9 (Object for user defined exchange)

Weight value %IDxy.0.0

Net weight flag %IWxy.0.4:X8

Stability flag %IWxy.0.4:X9

Zero flag %IWxy.0.4:X10

Discrete S0 output status %IWxy.0.4:X0

Discrete S1 output status %IWxy.0.4:X1

Flow %IDxy.0.2

Tare value %IDxy.0.5

Shift register memory %IDxy.0.7

Zero follower flag %IWxy.0.4:X11

Predetermined tare flag %IWxy.0.4:X12

392

Operation

Description of the display transfer

General The identifiers provided by the module to the TSX XBT H100 display panel are metrological identifiers (see the documentation on the installation of the TSX XBT H100).This display is done automatically, without having to be programmed.

Illustration The following illustration introduces the TSX XBT H100 display panel.

Note: On the TSX XBT H100, a slot is reserved on the punched rating plate to comply with the constraints specified by the legal metrology.

1 2 3 4 5

393

Operation

Description of the display

All valid measurements are sent to the display panel in a fixed point physical unit every 100ms. The following table describes the identifiers that can appear on the display panel in a normal operation.

Error messages The following table describes the error identifiers that can appear on the display panel.

Address Identifier Description

1 = The measurement is stable.

none Measurement is not stable (the stability criteria are set in configuration).

2 Net The measurement indicates a Net weight.

none The measurement indicates a gross weight.

3 + The measurement is positive

0 The measurement is around 0 (in the range between –1/4 and +1/4 grades).

- The measurement is negative: the associated digital value blinks: the measurement is between –9 grades and –1/

4 grades if no associated digital value is displayed: the measurement is below –9 grades.

4 141.25 Digital value of the weight.

5 kg Unir of mass measurement symbol: g for gram, kg for kilogram, lb for pound, oz for ounce and t for metric tonne.

Note: Testing the serial link is done at the weighing module’s power-up. For this the TSX XBT H100 display panel module must be connected to the TSX ISP Y100 at the PLC’s power-up.

Identifier Description

------------- The measurement is not valid, a channel error is detected.

>>>>> Detection of an overload.

<<<<< Detection of an underload.

Time out The display panel no longer receives the weighing module’s data.

Checksum error

A problem has been encountered at power-up. At power-up, the TSX XBT H100 runs a test on its resources. During operation, all received information is monitored. If there is a problem, the checksum error is displayed.

394

Operation

Weighing module operating modes

Operation The following illustration describes the operation of the module.

Behavior on encountering an error

During power-up, the module carries out its own self-tests (REPROM , RAM, Link display, etc.).If an error is detected at the end of these tests, the module switches to fall back mode, the outputs are at 0.Similarly, if, when operating normally, an internal malfunction (error in RAM, CDG, etc.) is detected in the module, the outputs are positioned to 0 and the display shows dashes on the screen (----).

Behavior on power outage

On power outage the machine parameters are saved (Tare mode, Zero offset, etc.) whereas the operating parameters are lost (Thresholds, number of measurements used to calculate flow rate, etc.).

Power-up

Self-testing

End self-testing

EnableFail

Internal error

Internal error

395

Operation

396

21
Diagnostics of the weighing application
Introduction to Diagnostics

General Module or application faults can be detected using the following methods: display LEDs on the front face of the module, debugging screen, diagnostic screens accessible by the DIAG keys from the debugging screen, faulty bits and status words.

Display LEDs The operation and status of the module are shown on the display block, these display LEDs are reported in a software method in the debugging screen (See Description of the module zone on the debugging screen, p. 380): two display LEDs display the apply voltage and the correct operation of the

module (RUN in green and ERR in red), the I/O display LED (red) displays an external fault on the measurement channel.The following table describes the status of the module in operation and the status of the display LEDs.

Display LED

Lit Flashing Off

RUN Working normally - Module faulty or switched off

ERR Internal error, module broken down

Communication error, missing, invalid or faulty application.

No error

IO External errors: overload or underload

error during calibration, range overshoot error, measurement error, sealed module

(configuration refused)

Absence of the measurement sensors connector.

No error

397

Diagnostics

Diagnostics screens

The diagnostic screens are accessible using the DIAG buttons from the debugging screen. They enable you to carry out a detailed diagnostic.

When an error is detected, the red indicator lamp located on the DIAG button is lit.

The screen gives 2 DIAG buttons: module diagnostic, detects module errors (module broken, missing, switched off

etc.), channel diagnostic (below), detects application errors (range overshoot, overload

etc.).The following illustration shows a diagnostic screen.

Bit and word objects

The following bit and word objects can be used in the animation tables or at program level to detect errors.

OK

Module Diagnostics

Internal errors External errors Other errors

Object Meaning when the bit is at status 1

%Ixy.MOD.ERR Indicates that the module is faulty.

%Ixy.0.ERR Indicates that the channel is faulty.

%IWxy.0.4:X2 Indicator that voltage is too low. The measurement is deviating. There is a strong possibility of an error on a sensor or in the wiring.

%IWxy.0.4:X3 Voltage too high on module input.

%IWxy.0.4:X7 Fault during command

%IWxy.0.4:X9 Measurement instability. This is set when the measurement is outside the stability range during the defined time. The extent of the stability range and the time are defined during configuration.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X0 Internal error: Module Out of Order.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X1 Functional Error: communication or application error

%MWxy.MOD.2:X5 Configuration Error: the module recognized is not the one expected.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X6 Module fault, missing or switched off

%MWxy.0.2:X0 External error: Overload or underload during calibration

398

Diagnostics

%MWxy.0.2:X1 Range overshoot fault or dynamics lower than 4.5mV at calibration.

%MWxy.0.2:X2 External error: saturation of the measurement circuit

%MWxy.0.2:X3 External error: sealed module, configuration refused

%MWxy.0.2:X4 Internal error: module out of order

%MWxy.0.2:X5 Configuration Error: the current module is not the one declared at configuration

%MWxy.0.2:X6 Communication fault with the processor

%MWxy.0.2:X7 Application fault

%MWxy.0.2:X8 Protected module error, parameter refused: the module refuses the parameter if it influences the current value.

%MWxy.0.2:X9 Non-calibrated module

%MWxy.0.2:X10 Overload error

%MWxy.0.2:X11 Underload error

Object Meaning when the bit is at status 1

399

Diagnostics

400

22
Examples of the weighing program
At a glance

Aim of this chapter

This chapter provides programming examples for a weighing application.



Topic Page

Example of a tare mode 402

Dosage example 404

401

Examples

Example of a tare mode

Description of the example

This example emphasizes the running of a weighing process by focusing on the essential operations to be carried out: it deals with carrying out a switch into NET weight (tare mode).

Program The %M101 bit is used for this action. Its positioning causes the gross weight, which is currently measured as the weighed tare, to be acknowledged, then it causes the display to be switched to NET mode.

(* Closed weighing module, slot 6 *)!(* waiting for tare mode conditions *)

IF %M100 THENIF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1THEN

SET %M101;RESET %M100;

ELSERETURN;

END_IF;END_IF

!(* Tare mode *)IF %M101 THEN

(* send tare mode order *)IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1 AND NOT %M102 THEN

%MW6.0.3:=0;SET %MW6.0.3:X4;WRITE_CMD %CH6.0;SET %M102;

END_IF;(* tare mode ended and OK *)IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1 THEN

%MW6.0.3:=0;RESET %M101;RESET %M102;SET %M103;

ELSE(* tare mode refused => error *)

IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND %MW6.0.1:X1 THENSET %M200;%MW6.0.3:=0;RESET %M101;RESET %M102;RESET %MW6.0.1:X1;SET %M100;

END_IF;END_IF;

END_IF;

402

Examples

Summary The following table summarizes the language objects for monitoring the exchanges.

%MW6.0:X1 Exchange in progress

%MW6.0.1:X1 Report on the exchanges

%MW6.0.3:X4 Tare mode order

%MW6.0.3 Command order (Tare mode, calibration, etc…)

403

Examples

Dosage example

Description of the example

The following example uses a weighing module in slot 2 of the PLC.It describes a dosage application split into steps as in the diagram below.

Data used in the program

The following table describes the data used in the program for the weighing module:

Init

Send thresholds

Tare mode

Dosage monitoring

continued

%IW2.0.4:X0 Image of the S0 output.

%IW2.0.4:X1 Image of the S1 output.

%IW2.0.4:X5 In progress flag

%CH2.0 Data structure for sending the command

%MD2.0.8 Large flow cut off point S0

%MD2.0.10 Small flow cut off point S1

%MW2.0:X1 Exchange in progress

%MW2.0:X2 Send in progress

%MW2.0.1:X1 Command accepted

%MW2.0.1:X2 Command accepted

%MW2.0.2:X2 Saturation of the measurement string

%MW2.0.2:X7 Application fault

%MW2.0.3 Command order

404

Examples

Program The program is processed in structured text:

Main Program

(* ///////// Sending thresholds ///////////*)%L100:

IF NOT %M99 THENJUMP %L120;

END_IF;

(*Loading and sending the thresholds *)IF RE %M99 THEN

%MD2.0.8:=%MD230;(* S0 Large Flow cut off point*)%MD2.0.10:=%MD232; (* S1 Small Flow cut off point *)WRITE_PARAM %CH2.0;JUMP %L120;

END_IF;

(*Send in progress*)IF %MW2.0:X2 THEN

JUMP %L120;END_IF;

(*command accepted*)IF NOT %MW2.0.1:X2 THEN

RESET %M99;END_IF;

(*END INIT CYCLE*)%L120:

(* //////// TARE MODE PHASE (%MW100 =4) //////////// *)

%L260:IF %MW100<>4 THEN

JUMP %L300;END_IF;

(*Tare mode request *)IF %M72 THEN

RESET %M72;%MW270:2:=4;

END_IF;

(*Management of commands *)SR8; (* %MW270 informs the command type of tare mode 4 *)

(*Waiting for tare mode resonse*)IF %MW270=-1 AND %MW271=-1 THEN

%MW100:=5;SET %M72;JUMP %L800;

END_IF;

405

Examples

Program (continued) (* //////// DOSAGE PHASE (%MW100 =5) //////////// *)%L300:

IF %MW100<>5 THENJUMP %L340;

END_IF;

(*Confirmation of the thresholds*)IF %M72 THEN

RESET %M72;%MW270:2:=8;

END_IF;

(*Management of commands *)SR8;(* %MW270 = command type of thresholds confirmation 8 *)

(*Waiting for tare mode response*)IF %MW270>=0 OR %MW271>=0 THEN

JUMP %L800;END_IF;

(*Monitor outputs to continue*)IF NOT %IW2.0.4:X0 AND NOT %IW2.0.4:X1 THEN

%MW100:=6;SET %M72;JUMP %L800;

END_IF;

(*PHASE 6 continued *)%L340:

IF %MW100<>6 THENJUMP %L380;

END_IF;%L800:

SUBROUTINE SR8:

(* Send request for the module*)IF %MW270>=0 THEN (* %MW270 informs of the order to be carried

out *)%M0:16:=0;SET %M0[%MW270];%MW2.0.3:=%M0:16;%MW271:=%MW270;%MW270:=-1;WRITE_CMD %CH2.0;RET;

END_IF;

(*Command in progress ?*)IF %MW2.0:X1 OR %IW2.0.4:X5 THEN

RET;END_IF;

(*command accepted ?*)IF NOT %MW2.0.1:X1 AND NOT %MW2.0.2:X7 THEN

%MW270:2:=-1;ELSE

%MW270:=%MW271;END_IF;

406

Glossary

Calibration Grading a measuring appliance.

CCX17 Schneider Automation operator dialogue desk family.

Closed loop adjustment

PID research method which consists of using a proportional command to start the procedure until it starts to oscillate

Comparison Function, which allows you to cancel the static error of a PID without, integral action

Configuration The configuration gathers together the data which characterize the machine (invariable) and which are necessary for the operation of the module. All this information is stored in the PLC %KW constants zone. The PLC application can not modify them.

CPU Central Processing Unit: generic name for Schneider Automation processors.

Debugging Debugging is a PL7 service which supports direct control of the module in connected mode.

Derivative action Third parameter of a PID which allows you to anticipate what will happen by accelerating or slowing down a process response.

C

D

407

Glossary

Device for setting to zero

Device supporting "readjustment" of the flag if the zero has drifted (because of an overwrite, for example). This operation can only be done within the zero’s print range (+/-2% or +/-5% of the maximum range according to the type of weighing instrument).

Discrete Discrete inputs/outputs.

Explicit exchanges

Exchanges between the CPU and the task modules, initiated by the PL7 program for updating module-specific data.

FIPIO Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices.

Flag device (for a weighing instrument)

The part of the device that measures the load where the direct reading of the result is obtained (TSX XBT H100).

Grade A value shown as a unit of mass for the difference between two consecutive identifiers for a numerical identifier.

Gross weight Indication of the load’s weight on an instrument, when no tare or tare predetermi-nation device has been implemented.

I/O Inputs/Outputs

E

F

G

I

408

Glossary

Integral action Second parameter of a PID which supports the deletion of a static error.

Leading Encasing an appliance in lead. Putting a rider in the weighing module makes this function possible.This device guarantees measurement conformity. The accessible parameters only concern the operating aspects of the module’s information via the process control (the parameters able to modify the measurement conformity: unit, range, grade… are therefore accessible in read-only).

Load holder device

The part of the instrument for holding the load.

Load limit (Lim) The maximum static load that the instrument can support without permanently altering its metrological qualities.

Maximum range (Max)

Maximum weighing capacity, not including the tare’s additional capacity.

Metrology The science of weight and measurements.

Minimum range (Min)

The load value below which the weighing results can be affected by a very important error.

Momentum Inputs/outputs modules using several open standard communication networks.

Net weight (N) Indication of a load’s weight on an instrument after implementing a tare device. Net weight = Gross weight – Tare weight

L

M

N

409

Glossary

Non-automatic weighing instruments

Weighing instruments that need to be manned during weighing, for example when placing or removing loads from the load holder device, as well as for getting the result. These instruments support direct observation of the result of the weighing, either by displaying it or printing it.The two possibilities are covered by the " identifier " word.

Open loop adjustment

PID research method which consists of applying a level to the output and make the response the same as an integrator with pure delay time

Operating mode It is the group of rules which govern the behavior of the module during the transitional phases or upon the appearance of a fault.

PID Regulation algorithm made up of a Proportional action, anIntegral action and a Derivative action.

PID in tandem Adjustment technique which consists of linking 2 PID in a chain and instructing the second via commands from the first.

PL7 Programming software of the Schneider Automation PLCs.

Proportional action

First parameter of a PID which allows you to match the processor’s response speed.

Regulation loop Group containing the acquisition of analog measurements, the execution of a PID and the sending of analog commands

O

P

R

410

Glossary

Tare The load placed on the load holder along with the product to be weighed. For example: packaging or a product’s container.

Tare device Device that allows you to lead the instrument’s identifier to zero when a load is placed on the load holder: without encroaching on the weighing print range of the net loads (tare additive

device), or reducing the weighing print range of the net loads (tare subtractive device, with

the ISP Y100).

Tare mode An action that allows you to lead the instrument’s identifier to zero when a load is placed on the load holder.

Tare predeter-mining device

Device supporting subtraction of a predetermined tare value from a gross weight value, which shows the result of this calculation. As a result, the weighing print range is reduced.

TBX Remote analog input/output modules on the FIPIO bus.

TSX/PMX/PCX57 Family of Schneider Automation hardware products.

Value of the predetermined tare (PT)

A numerical value, representing a weight, which is entered into the instrument, by input during configuration or setting, or by program.

Value of the tare (T)

The value of a load’s weight, determined by a tare weighing device.

Weighing instruments

Measuring instruments that determine a body’s mass by using the action of gravity.

T

V

W

411

Glossary

These instruments can also be used to determine other sizes, quantities, parameters or characteristics to do with the mass. According to their operating nature, the weighing instruments are classed as automatic operation or non-automatic operation.

Weighing print range

The gap between the minimum and maximum range.

Zero follower A device allowing you to capture any of the zero’s slow drifts, within the limits of the zero format’s print range.

Zero Load Empty load holder equipped with its mechanical accessories (vibrating extractor, screws, hatch, jack,…). It does not appear in the weight indication, but it must be taken into account for the maximum sensor load calculation.

Z

412

CBIndex

Symbols%MW@module, 230

Numerics170 AAI 030 00, 124170 AAI 140 00, 128170 AAI 520 40, 134170 AAO 120 00, 141170 AAO 921 00, 146170 AMM 090 00, 151

AAccessing the configuration editor

racked analog, 167remote I/Os, 169

AddressingAnalog rack modules, 219FIPIO bus, 222Momentum, 222TBX, 222

addressingweighing, 330

AEY 1600, 21AEY 800, 21Alignment, 210Analog, 17analog, 15Associated task

analog, 184

BBit language objects

Weighing, 336

CCalibration, 214calibration

weighing, 368Channel diagnostics, 206Channel fault, 206channel status word

weighing, 344Channel zone

analog, 164, 166Closed loop adjustment, 292Cold junction compensation, 194

AEY 414, 66Configuration, 161, 162configuration

weighing, 312weighing parameter, 313

Configuration functionanalog, 163, 165

Controlling a loop, 269Copy/Paste, 170

DData format

Weighing, 318Debugging, 199, 200

413

Index

Debugging screen, 201Default parameters

analog, 173, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181Derivative action, 296Dialog operator, 266Display

Weighing, 393

EExample of application, 281explicit exchange

weighing, 340Explicit objects, 229explicit objects, 342

FFallback mode

analog, 196Fallback to 0

analog, 196Fallback value, 212FAST

analog, 184Filter

analog, 189, 208Filter alpha coefficient

analog, 189Filter value

analog, 189filtering

weighing, 320Filtering value

analog, 208FIPIO, 169flow

weighing, 322forced calibration

weighing, 375Forcing, 204

GGrade, 315

414

HHigh precision mode, 195

Iimplicit exchanges

weighing, 337Integral action, 295

LLanguage objects, 229language objects, 342language word objects

weighing, 337Leading

Weighing, 388

MMaintain the value

analog, 196MAST

analog, 184Maximum range, 315Measurement display, 51Measurement stability

Weighing, 319Metrological information, 315Modifying parameters, 170Module diagnostics, 203Module fault, 203Module status word

Weighing, 343Module zone

analog, 164, 166Monitoring supply faults, 197Monitoring under/overshoots

ASY 800, 89Multiple selection, 170

OObjects

implicit, 225

Index

Open loop adjustment, 293Operating mode

Weighing, 395Operating modes, 263Operating modes of the dialog operator, 275Output behavior

ASY 800, 90Overload threshold, 315

PPID function, 245PID_MMI function, 271Presence of terminal block, 191Presymbolization

Weighing, 333Programming

Weighing, 329Programming rules, 244Proportional action, 294protection

weighing adjustment, 386PWM function, 252

RRange, 183READ_PARAM

Pesage, 360Regulation functions, 237, 243RESTORE_PARAM

Weighing, 360

SSAVE_PARAM

Weighing, 360Scale

analog, 164, 166thermo, 187voltage/current, 185

Scanning cycleanalog, 190

Selecting a loop, 268Sensor alignment, 103, 116SERVO function, 256

Setting to zeroWeighing, 351

Sortieweighing, 324

Supply to outputs, 197

Ttare, 323Tare mode, 348Task

Weighing configuration, 314TBX AES 400, 92TBX ASS 200, 117Terminal block detection, 197threshold

weighing, 324, 355Timing of AEY1614 measurements, 46TSX AEY 1600, 20TSX AEY 1614, 43TSX AEY 414, 55TSX AEY 420, 69TSX AEY 800, 20TSX AEY 810, 32TSX ASY 410, 79TSX ASY 800, 79

UUnforcing, 204Units of weight, 315User defined exchanges

Weighing, 336

WWeighing, 299

Operation, 304weighing

implementing, 306WRITE_CMD

weighing, 347WRITE_PARAM

Weighing, 360

415

Index

ZZero

Weighing, 317Zero follower

Weighing, 317

416